# CommandSection

title: METADATA (.TRASHINFO)
content:
The rich information displayed by <i>trash-list</i>, such as the original path and deletion date, is extracted from <i>.trashinfo</i> files. For every item moved to the trash via <b>trash-put</b>, a corresponding <i>.trashinfo</i> file is created in the <i>info</i> subdirectory, detailing its original location and the timestamp of deletion.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>trash-cli</b> project, which includes <i>trash-list</i>, was developed to provide a command-line interface adhering to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification. Its primary goal is to offer a safer and more user-friendly alternative to the permanent deletion caused by commands like <b>rm</b>. <i>trash-list</i> has been a fundamental component of this suite since its early stages, providing users with essential visibility into their trashed items and facilitating trash management.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows verbose output, explaining what is being done during the operation.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows detailed debug output, primarily useful for development or troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--force-autodelete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces automatic deletion of the oldest files in the trash if the trash bin becomes full during the operation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>trash-put</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>trash-cli</i> package that safely moves specified files and directories into the user's trash bin. Unlike <b>rm</b>, which permanently deletes files, <i>trash-put</i> allows for recovery of trashed items. It adheres to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification, meaning files are moved to a specific trash directory (usually <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>) along with metadata about their original location and deletion time. This makes it a safer alternative to <b>rm</b> for everyday file management on the command line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>trash-put</i> moves files to the user's trash directory, typically <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>, not necessarily to an external drive's trash.<br>Files are not permanently deleted until the trash is emptied, either manually or if the trash fills up and <b>--force-autodelete</b> is active.<br>This command relies on the <i>trash-cli</i> package being installed.


title: FREEDESKTOP.ORG TRASH SPECIFICATION
content:
<i>trash-put</i> strictly adheres to the FreeDesktop.org Trash Specification. This ensures that files moved to the trash via the command line are fully compatible with graphical desktop environments like GNOME, KDE, and XFCE. Items trashed using <i>trash-put</i> will appear in the GUI's trash bin and can be restored or permanently deleted from there.


title: TRASH LOCATION
content:
By default, the user's trash directory is located at <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>.<br>Inside this directory, trashed items are stored in the <i>files/</i> subdirectory, while metadata (original path, deletion date) for each item is kept in corresponding files within the <i>info/</i> subdirectory.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>trash-cli</i> project, which includes <i>trash-put</i>, was developed to provide a robust command-line interface that complies with the FreeDesktop.org Trash Specification. This initiative aimed to standardize trash management across various Linux desktop environments, allowing users to safely "delete" files to a recoverable state from the terminal. Its development started around 2008-2009, bringing GUI-like trash functionality to the command line.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h, --help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits, providing information on command usage and available options.<br><br><b><b>-v, --version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the program's version number and exits.<br><br><b><b>[<I>pattern</I>]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An optional argument used to filter the list of trashed items. It accepts a regular expression or shell glob pattern to narrow down the results displayed for interactive selection.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>trash-restore</b> is a command-line utility from the <b>trash-cli</b> suite, designed to help users recover files that have been moved to the trash according to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification. Unlike permanent deletion with <b>rm</b>, files "trashed" using commands like <b>trash-put</b> are moved to a special directory, typically <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>, providing a safety net. This command allows you to browse an interactive list of trashed items, including their original path, deletion date, and size. Users can then select specific items or ranges of items to restore them, by default, to their original location. This functionality is crucial for recovering accidentally deleted files, offering a terminal-based equivalent of a graphical desktop environment's trash can. It ensures a safer file management workflow from the command line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Caveats include potential issues if the original restoration path no longer exists, or during name collisions at the restore location, where the command might prompt for resolution or append suffixes. <b>trash-restore</b> exclusively manages files adhering to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification and is not a substitute for a comprehensive data backup solution. Users should also be aware that file permissions might be affected during the trash and restoration process.


title: INTERACTIVE RESTORATION
content:
When invoked without a specific pattern, <b>trash-restore</b> presents a numbered, interactive list of all trashed files. Users can then select one or more items to restore by entering their corresponding numbers, ranges (e.g., '1-5'), or combinations. This interactive nature makes it user-friendly.


title: FREEDESKTOP.ORG TRASH SPECIFICATION
content:
The core of <b>trash-cli</b>'s functionality, including <b>trash-restore</b>, relies on the FreeDesktop.org Trash Specification. This ensures that files trashed by graphical file managers (like Nautilus, Dolphin, Thunar) can be restored via the command line, and vice-versa, promoting seamless interoperability between GUI and CLI environments.


title: RESTORATION LOCATION
content:
By default, files are restored to their exact original path from which they were deleted, preserving the directory structure. If the original directory no longer exists, the command might attempt to recreate it during the restoration process, though user confirmation might be required depending on the scenario.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>trash-cli</b> project, which includes <b>trash-restore</b>, was developed to provide a robust command-line interface adhering to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification. This specification standardizes how files are moved to 'trash' across different Linux desktop environments. Its inception provided a safer and more user-friendly alternative to permanent deletion with <b>rm</b>, mirroring the functionality of graphical trash cans directly from the terminal. Over time, it has become a widely adopted utility for managing trashed files in command-line environments, focusing on compatibility and user experience across various desktop setups.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--force, -f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Ignore non-existent files and arguments, never prompt.</i><br><br><b>--interactive, -i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Prompt before every removal.</i><br><br><b>--recursive, -R, -r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Remove directories and their contents recursively.</i><br><br><b>--verbose, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Explain what is being done.</i><br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display a help message and exit.</i><br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Output version information and exit.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>trash-rm</i> is a command-line utility that acts as a safer alternative to the standard <i>rm</i> command.<br>Instead of permanently deleting files and directories, <i>trash-rm</i> moves them to the user's trash bin, typically located at <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>, adhering to the Freedesktop.org Trash Specification. This allows for easy recovery of accidentally deleted items, providing a crucial safety net for command-line users. It's particularly useful when dealing with sensitive data or when you want to avoid immediate, irreversible deletion.<br>The command supports recursive removal of directories and common options similar to <i>rm</i>, making it a familiar and secure replacement for everyday file management tasks. Files moved to the trash can be restored later using <i>trash-restore</i> or permanently removed using <i>trash-empty</i>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>trash-rm</i> provides a safety net by moving files to the trash, it does not guarantee permanent deletion. Users must explicitly empty the trash to free up disk space or permanently remove files. The trash bin is typically stored on the same filesystem as the user's home directory; moving very large files across filesystems might be slower as it may involve a copy operation.<br>Files on read-only filesystems cannot be trashed. The command relies on the Freedesktop.org Trash specification; environments not adhering to this might not fully integrate with graphical trash bins.


title: FREEDESKTOP.ORG TRASH SPECIFICATION
content:
<i>trash-rm</i> adheres to the Freedesktop.org Trash Specification, meaning files are moved to a standardized location (typically <i>~/.local/share/Trash</i>) along with metadata about their original path and deletion date. This allows compatibility with graphical desktop environments' trash bins and easy restoration.


title: DISK SPACE MANAGEMENT
content:
Since <i>trash-rm</i> moves files rather than deleting them, trashed files continue to consume disk space. Users must periodically empty their trash (e.g., using <i>trash-empty</i>) to reclaim storage. Unmanaged trash can potentially fill up a disk over time.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>trash-rm</i> is part of the <b>trash-cli</b> project, a set of command-line tools designed to interact with the Freedesktop.org Trash specification. This specification defines a standardized way for applications to move files to a trash folder, enabling consistency across desktop environments.<br><b>trash-cli</b> was developed to bring this standardized trash functionality to the command line, providing a safer alternative to the traditional <i>rm</i> command, which permanently deletes files without a recovery option. The project aims to integrate seamlessly with the user's existing desktop trash bin.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help message and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays verbose output, showing details of the operation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term "trashy" often refers to command-line utilities that mimic the graphical desktop environment's 'Trash' or 'Recycle Bin' functionality. Instead of permanently deleting files like the <b><I>rm</I></b> command, a "trashy" command moves files to a special, hidden directory from which they can potentially be recovered later. The most widely used and robust implementation for Linux command-line users is provided by the <b><I>trash-cli</I></b> package.<br><br><b><I>trash-cli</I></b> offers a suite of commands: <b><I>trash-put</I></b> (to move files to trash), <b><I>trash-list</I></b> (to view trashed files), <b><I>trash-restore</I></b> (to recover files), <b><I>trash-empty</I></b> (to permanently delete all trashed files), and <b><I>trash-rm</I></b> (to permanently delete specific trashed files). This provides a crucial safety net against accidental data loss, making it a preferred alternative to <b><I>rm</I></b> for many users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command '<b><I>trashy</I></b>' itself is not a standard Linux utility. This analysis refers to the functionality typically provided by the popular third-party package '<b><I>trash-cli</I></b>'.<br><br>Installation of <b><I>trash-cli</I></b> is required (e.g., <b><I>sudo apt install trash-cli</I></b> or <b><I>pip install trash-cli</I></b>).<br><br>Files are not immediately deleted but moved to a trash directory, typically <b><I>~/.local/share/Trash</I></b> in compliance with the XDG Base Directory Specification. This means the files still consume disk space until the trash is emptied.


title: THE <B><I>TRASH-CLI</I></B> SUITE
content:
Beyond <b><I>trash-put</I></b>, the <b><I>trash-cli</I></b> package provides several other commands crucial for managing trashed files:<br><b><I>trash-list</I></b>: Lists all files currently in the trash, along with their original paths and deletion dates.<br><b><I>trash-restore</I></b>: Allows interactive restoration of files from the trash to their original location or a specified directory.<br><b><I>trash-empty</I></b>: Permanently deletes all files in the trash. It can also delete files older than a specified number of days or delete a specific number of oldest files.<br><b><I>trash-rm</I></b>: Permanently removes specific files from the trash, identified by their trash ID or name. This is for selective permanent deletion within the trash.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of a 'trash can' or 'recycle bin' originated in graphical user interfaces (GUIs) to prevent accidental file deletion. On the command line, users traditionally relied on <b><I>rm</I></b>, which offers no recovery. Various scripts and utilities emerged to bridge this gap, with <b><I>trash-cli</I></b> becoming one of the most prominent and widely adopted solutions for Linux command-line environments. Its development aimed to provide a robust, cross-desktop-compatible trash utility, adhering to the FreeDesktop.org Trash specification, enabling seamless interaction with GUI trash functionality.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>travis</b> <I>command</I> [<I>options</I>]<br><b>travis</b> <I>--version</I><br><b>travis</b> <I>--help</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>login</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Logs in to Travis CI, typically via GitHub authentication.<br><br><b>logout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Logs out of Travis CI.<br><br><b>enable <repository></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables Travis CI for a specified GitHub repository.<br><br><b>disable <repository></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables Travis CI for a specified GitHub repository.<br><br><b>encrypt <string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encrypts a string (e.g., API key) for use in the .travis.yml file.<br><br><b>encrypt-file <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encrypts a file for use with Travis CI.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the current build status of the repository in the current directory.<br><br><b>logs <job_id></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the logs for a specific build job.<br><br><b>restart <job_id></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restarts a specific build job.<br><br><b>rebuild</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Triggers a new build for the repository in the current directory.<br><br><b>lint</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lints the .travis.yml file to check for syntax errors.<br><br><b>--pro</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Targets the Travis CI Pro (travis-ci.com) platform instead of the open source (travis-ci.org).<br><br><b>--org</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Targets the Travis CI Open Source (travis-ci.org) platform.<br><br><b>--debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debugging output.<br><br><b>--skip-version-check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips the check for a newer version of the Travis CLI.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>travis</b> command is the official command-line interface (CLI) for interacting with <I>Travis CI</I>, a popular hosted continuous integration service. It allows developers to manage their Travis CI projects directly from the terminal, automating common tasks and integrating seamlessly with build workflows. With the <b>travis</b> CLI, users can perform operations such as logging in, enabling or disabling repositories, triggering builds, viewing build logs, encrypting sensitive environment variables, and inspecting the status of ongoing and past builds. It acts as a powerful bridge between your local development environment and the Travis CI platform, simplifying the configuration and management of continuous integration and continuous deployment (CI/CD) pipelines. Written as a Ruby Gem, it interacts with the Travis CI API to provide a comprehensive set of functionalities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>travis</b> command requires a <I>Ruby environment</I> to be installed on the system, as it is distributed as a Ruby Gem. Its functionality is entirely dependent on the availability and responsiveness of the Travis CI service and the user's authentication credentials. It also assumes a basic understanding of <I>Git</I> and <I>GitHub</I> for repository management and webhooks.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
The <b>travis</b> command is typically installed via <I>RubyGems</I>. If Ruby and RubyGems are set up on your system, you can install it using: <code>gem install travis</code>. It is recommended to use a Ruby version manager like RVM or rbenv to manage Ruby installations.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
The behavior of Travis CI for a repository is primarily defined by a <I>.travis.yml</I> file located in the root of the repository. The <b>travis</b> CLI interacts with and helps manage aspects related to this configuration, such as encrypting sensitive data to be stored within it.


title: HISTORY
content:
Travis CI emerged in <I>2011</I> as one of the early and widely adopted hosted continuous integration services, particularly popular within the open-source community due to its tight integration with GitHub. The <b>travis</b> command-line client was developed alongside the platform, initially as a Ruby Gem, to provide a programmatic interface for interacting with the Travis CI API. Over time, it has evolved to support new features of the Travis CI platform, such as <I>build stages</I>, <I>encrypted environment variables</I>, and enhanced <I>configuration validation</I> (linting), becoming an essential tool for developers and CI/CD engineers managing Travis CI workflows.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>trawl</b> is not a standard utility or program found in common Linux distributions like Debian, Ubuntu, Fedora, or Red Hat Enterprise Linux. It is highly probable that it refers to a custom script, a typo, or a very specialized tool that is not widely adopted or maintained.<br><br>As there is no universally defined <b>trawl</b> command, its functionality, syntax, and options are not part of the standard Linux command set. Any specific usage of a command named <b>trawl</b> would depend entirely on its custom implementation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <b>trawl</b> is not a standard utility in common Linux distributions.<br>Information regarding its functionality, options, and usage cannot be universally provided as it is not part of the core Linux command set.<br>If you encountered this command, it is likely a custom script, an alias, or part of a niche application.


title: HISTORY
content:
No documented history for a standard <b>trawl</b> command exists, as it is not a recognized part of the GNU/Linux core utilities or common packages.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i><br><b>trayer</b> [<b>--edge</b> &lt;top|bottom|left|right&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--align</b> &lt;left|center|right&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--width</b> &lt;pixels&gt; | <b>--widthtype</b> &lt;request|pixel|percent&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--height</b> &lt;pixels&gt; | <b>--heighttype</b> &lt;request|pixel|percent&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--margin</b> &lt;pixels&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--transparent</b> &lt;true|false&gt; <b>--alpha</b> &lt;0-255&gt; | <b>--tint</b> &lt;RRGGBB&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--monitor</b> &lt;num|primary|all&gt; | <b>--output</b> &lt;name|primary|all&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--distance</b> &lt;pixels&gt; <b>--distancefrom</b> &lt;top|bottom|left|right&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--expand</b> &lt;true|false&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--padding</b> &lt;pixels&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--SetDockType</b> &lt;true|false&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--SetPartialStrut</b> &lt;true|false&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--hide-on-maximize</b> &lt;true|false&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--border</b> &lt;normal|none|solid|dot|dash&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--border-width</b> &lt;pixels&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--border-color</b> &lt;RRGGBB&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--resize-app-icons</b> &lt;int&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--align-center-icons</b> &lt;true|false&gt;]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--verbose</b>]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--version</b>]<br>
&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;[<b>--help</b>]</i><br>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--edge</b> &lt;top|bottom|left|right&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Position the tray along a specific screen edge.</i><br><br><b><b>--align</b> &lt;left|center|right&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Align icons within the tray along the specified direction.</i><br><br><b><b>--width</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set a fixed width for the tray in pixels.</i><br><br><b><b>--widthtype</b> &lt;request|pixel|percent&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Define how the tray's width is determined: based on icon requests, a fixed pixel value, or a percentage of screen width.</i><br><br><b><b>--height</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set a fixed height for the tray in pixels.</i><br><br><b><b>--heighttype</b> &lt;request|pixel|percent&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Define how the tray's height is determined: based on icon requests, a fixed pixel value, or a percentage of screen height.</i><br><br><b><b>--margin</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set a margin (offset) from the screen edge.</i><br><br><b><b>--transparent</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enable or disable background transparency.</i><br><br><b><b>--alpha</b> &lt;0-255&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the transparency level (0 for full transparency, 255 for opaque) when <b>--transparent</b> is <b>true</b>.</i><br><br><b><b>--tint</b> &lt;RRGGBB&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the background color in hexadecimal RRGGBB format when transparency is disabled.</i><br><br><b><b>--monitor</b> &lt;num|primary|all&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify which monitor to display the tray on (e.g., 0, 1, primary, or all).</i><br><br><b><b>--output</b> &lt;name|primary|all&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Similar to <b>--monitor</b>, but uses Xrandr output names (e.g., DP-1, HDMI-0).</i><br><br><b><b>--distance</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set a distance in pixels from the edge specified by <b>--distancefrom</b>.</i><br><br><b><b>--distancefrom</b> &lt;top|bottom|left|right&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Define which edge <b>--distance</b> should measure from.</i><br><br><b><b>--expand</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Allow the tray to expand and fill available space along its edge.</i><br><br><b><b>--padding</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Add padding around icons within the tray.</i><br><br><b><b>--SetDockType</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Hint to the window manager that <b>trayer</b> should be treated as a dock.</i><br><br><b><b>--SetPartialStrut</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Hint to the window manager about reserving screen space for the tray, preventing windows from overlapping it.</i><br><br><b><b>--hide-on-maximize</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Hide the tray when a window is maximized.</i><br><br><b><b>--border</b> &lt;normal|none|solid|dot|dash&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the style of the tray's border.</i><br><br><b><b>--border-width</b> &lt;pixels&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the width of the tray's border.</i><br><br><b><b>--border-color</b> &lt;RRGGBB&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the color of the tray's border in hexadecimal RRGGBB format.</i><br><br><b><b>--resize-app-icons</b> &lt;int&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Resize all application icons to the specified square pixel size.</i><br><br><b><b>--align-center-icons</b> &lt;true|false&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Vertically center application icons within the tray.</i><br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enable verbose output for debugging.</i><br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display the <b>trayer</b> version information and exit.</i><br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display a help message with command-line options and exit.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><br><b>Trayer</b> is a compact and minimalist GTK-based system tray application designed for Linux. It serves as a visual container for application icons that support the <br>freedesktop.org System Tray Protocol, commonly known as <br>XEmbed system tray icons. Often used in conjunction with lightweight window managers like Openbox, i3, or bspwm that do not provide their own integrated system tray, <b>Trayer</b> allows users to manage and interact with background applications such as network managers, chat clients, or media players directly from their desktop. It offers a high degree of customizability regarding its position, size, transparency, and appearance, making it flexible enough to blend seamlessly into various desktop environments and user preferences. Its primary goal is to provide essential system tray functionality without the overhead of a full-fledged desktop environment panel.</i><br>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><br><b>Trayer</b> relies on the EWMH (Extended Window Manager Hints) and the <br>freedesktop.org System Tray Protocol. Compatibility issues may arise with applications or window managers that do not fully adhere to these standards. Transparency features often require a running compositor (e.g., Picom, Compton) to function correctly; without one, the <b>--transparent</b> option may not yield the desired visual effect. While highly customizable, <b>trayer</b>'s development is less active compared to full desktop environment panels, meaning new features or extensive bug fixes might be slower to arrive.</i><br>


title: <B>COMMON USAGE EXAMPLE</B>
content:
<i>A typical way to launch <b>trayer</b> for a top-right, transparent setup:<br><br><b>trayer</b> <b>--edge</b> top <b>--align</b> right <b>--widthtype</b> request <b>--height</b> 22 <b>--margin</b> 0 \<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>--transparent</b> true <b>--alpha</b> 0 <b>--SetDockType</b> true <b>--SetPartialStrut</b> true \<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>--expand</b> true <b>--monitor</b> primary <b>--tint</b> 0x000000 <b>--padding</b> 3<br><br>This command places <b>trayer</b> at the top-right corner, making it transparent and ensuring it occupies minimal space while hinting to the window manager about its presence.</i><br>


title: <B>INTEGRATION WITH WINDOW MANAGERS</B>
content:
<i>To ensure <b>trayer</b> starts with your session, it's typically added to your window manager's autostart file (e.g., <b>~/.config/openbox/autostart</b> for Openbox, or your <b>~/.xinitrc</b> file if starting X manually). It's crucial to run it as a background process, often by appending an ampersand (<b>&</b>) to the command.</i><br>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><br><b>Trayer</b> emerged as a solution for users of lightweight window managers who needed a system tray without the bloat of a full desktop environment. It provides a simple, dedicated space for application icons adhering to the XEmbed system tray specification. Its development has focused on maintaining core functionality and customization options, establishing it as a go-to choice for minimalists and users building custom desktop setups. It has remained a stable and reliable component for displaying system tray icons in various Linux environments over the years.</i><br>


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<i><b>tint2</b>(1)</i><br>, <i><b>xfce4-panel</b>(1)</i><br>, <i><b>lxpanel</b>(1)</i><br>, <i><b>polybar</b>(1)</i><br>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>trdsql</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] "<<i>SQL QUERY</i>>" [<i>FILE...</i>]<br>or<br><i>data</i> | <b>trdsql</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] "<<i>SQL QUERY</i>>"


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b>, <b>--input-format</b> <<i>FORMAT</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input data format (e.g., <i>CSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>LTSV</i>, <i>TBLN</i>, <i>RAW</i>). Defaults to `CSV`.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--output-format</b> <<i>FORMAT</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the desired output data format (e.g., <i>CSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>JSONL</i>, <i>AT</i> for aligned text, <i>GFM</i> for GitHub Flavored Markdown table). Defaults to `AT`.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--delimiter</b> <<i>CHAR</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the field delimiter character for CSV/TSV input. Can be a single character or a Go string literal like `\t`.<br><br><b><b>-H</b>, <b>--header</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Indicates that the first row of input should be treated as a header, using its values as column names.<br><br><b><b>-ih</b>, <b>--without-header</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats input as having no header row; columns will be automatically named <i>c1</i>, <i>c2</i>, etc.<br><br><b><b>-oh</b>, <b>--out-header</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes column headers in the output. Useful with formats like <i>CSV</i> or <i>AT</i>.<br><br><b><b>-E</b>, <b>--encoding</b> <<i>ENCODING</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input character encoding (e.g., <i>sjis</i>, <i>eucjp</i>, <i>utf8</i>). Defaults to `utf8`.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses informational messages and outputs only the query results.<br><br><b><b>-dl</b>, <b>--driver</b> <<i>DRIVER</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the database driver to use (<i>sqlite3</i> (default), <i>postgres</i>, <i>mysql</i>). Required for external connections.<br><br><b><b>-dsn</b>, <b>--dsn</b> <<i>DSN</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the Data Source Name for connecting to an external database (e.g., `user:password@tcp(host:port)/dbname`).<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--parallel</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables parallel processing for multiple input files, potentially speeding up large queries.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <b>trdsql</b> version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>trdsql</b> is a powerful command-line tool that enables users to query various structured text data formats using standard SQL. It treats input files such as <i>CSV</i>, <i>TSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>LTSV</i>, and even data piped from standard input, as virtual tables within an in-memory database. By default, <b>trdsql</b> leverages SQLite, providing a fast and efficient way to perform complex data manipulations, including filtering, sorting, aggregation, and joining across different files or data streams, directly from the terminal. Beyond its default SQLite backend, <b>trdsql</b> can connect to external databases like PostgreSQL and MySQL, acting as a versatile bridge between flat files and full-fledged relational database systems. It also offers flexible output options, allowing results to be formatted as <i>CSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>LTSV</i>, aligned text (<i>AT</i>), and more, making it an indispensable utility for data analysis, transformation, and reporting in any Unix-like environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using the default in-memory SQLite database, processing exceptionally large files or datasets may consume significant system RAM. Connecting to external databases requires careful configuration of the <i>DSN</i> string and ensuring the respective database drivers are correctly set up and accessible by <b>trdsql</b>. While highly flexible, for extremely simple, single-purpose text manipulations, specialized tools like <b>awk</b> or <b>sed</b> might offer marginally faster execution, though with significantly less SQL-like power and versatility.


title: SUPPORTED DATA FORMATS
content:
<b>trdsql</b> supports a wide array of input and output formats, making it highly adaptable for diverse data processing tasks. Input formats include <i>CSV</i>, <i>TSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>JSONL</i> (JSON Lines), <i>LTSV</i> (Labeled Tab-Separated Values), <i>TBLN</i>, and <i>RAW</i>. For output, it extends its capabilities to include <i>CSV</i>, <i>TSV</i>, <i>JSON</i>, <i>JSONL</i>, <i>LTSV</i>, <i>TBLN</i>, <i>AT</i> (aligned text table for human readability), <i>GFM</i> (GitHub Flavored Markdown table), and <i>RAW</i>.


title: SQL DIALECT
content:
When utilizing its default in-memory SQLite database, <b>trdsql</b> supports the widely used SQLite's SQL dialect. This means most standard SQL features, including <i>SELECT</i>, <i>FROM</i>, <i>WHERE</i>, <i>GROUP BY</i>, <i>ORDER BY</i>, <i>JOIN</i> operations, and various SQL functions, are fully available. When configured to connect to external databases such as PostgreSQL or MySQL using the <b>-dl</b> option, <b>trdsql</b> leverages their respective SQL dialects, ensuring broad compatibility with existing database queries and schemas.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>trdsql</b> was initiated by Noboru Iwamatsu, with its first public commits appearing in 2018. Developed primarily in Go, it was conceived as a high-performance, self-contained command-line utility capable of executing SQL queries directly on various text-based data formats. Its creation addressed a growing demand for a flexible command-line data processing tool that could leverage the familiarity and power of SQL without necessitating a full-blown database installation, evolving to incorporate extensive support for multiple input/output formats and external database connections.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;All files are printed. By default, dot-files (those beginning with a dot '.') are not printed.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List directories only.<br><br><b><b>-L <i>level</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Descend only <i>level</i> directories deep.<br><br><b><b>-F</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Append a '<b>/</b>' for directories, '<b>=</b>' for sockets, '<b>*</b>' for executables, '<b>|</b>' for FIFOs, and '<b>@</b>' for symbolic links.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print file sizes in a human-readable format (e.g., 1K, 234M, 2G).<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print file permissions for each file.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the size of each file in bytes.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the output by last modification time, newest first.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse the order of the sort.<br><br><b><b>-P <i>pattern</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List only those files that match the wildcard <i>pattern</i>.<br><br><b><b>-I <i>pattern</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not list those files that match the wildcard <i>pattern</i>.<br><br><b><b>-o <i>filename</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output to <i>filename</i> instead of stdout.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tree</i> is a recursive directory listing program that produces a depth indented listing of files, which is colorized by default. With no arguments, <i>tree</i> lists the files in the current directory. When directory arguments are given, <i>tree</i> lists all the files and directories found in them. It has many options to control the output format, filter entries, and display additional information such as file permissions, sizes, and last modification times.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command '<b>tre</b>' is not a standard Linux command and is very likely a common typographical error for '<b>tree</b>'. This response provides information for the '<b>tree</b>' command. The '<b>tree</b>' command is not part of the GNU core utilities and might need to be installed separately using your distribution's package manager (e.g., <b>apt install tree</b> or <b>yum install tree</b>).


title: INSTALLATION
content:
Since <b>tree</b> is not pre-installed on all systems, you can typically install it using your distribution's package manager:<br><br><i>Debian/Ubuntu</i>: <b>sudo apt update && sudo apt install tree</b><br><i>Fedora/RHEL/CentOS</i>: <b>sudo dnf install tree</b> or <b>sudo yum install tree</b><br><i>Arch Linux</i>: <b>sudo pacman -S tree</b>


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
Here are some common ways to use <b>tree</b>:<br><i>Displaying current directory structure</i>: <b>tree</b><br><i>Limiting depth</i>: <b>tree -L 2</b><br><i>Showing hidden files and permissions</i>: <b>tree -a -p</b><br><i>Excluding certain files</i>: <b>tree -I 'node_modules|*.log'</b><br><i>Saving output to a file</i>: <b>tree -o structure.txt</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tree</b> command has been a popular third-party utility in the Unix/Linux ecosystem for many years, providing a more visual and intuitive way to explore file system hierarchies compared to <b>ls</b>. Its exact origin date is not widely documented as a single project, but it has been a common tool distributed through various package managers across Linux distributions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats cycles as single edges for reduction. If an edge (u,v) is part of a cycle, and u and v are already connected by a path within that cycle, the edge is preserved if -c is used.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Strict mode. If the input graph is strict (no multiple edges between the same two nodes), the output will also be strict. This option ensures unique edges in the output.<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints version information for the <I>tred</I> utility to standard error.<br><br><b><i>file ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more input files containing graph descriptions in the <B>DOT language</B>. If no files are specified, <I>tred</I> reads from standard input (stdin).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tred</i> is a utility from the <I>Graphviz</I> suite designed to compute the transitive reduction of a directed graph. It takes a graph description in the <B>DOT language</B> as input, typically from a file or standard input, and outputs a new graph description in the same format. The core function of <I>tred</I> is to remove redundant edges: an edge (u, v) is removed if there is an alternative path from u to v that does not use the direct edge (u, v). This process simplifies the graph by showing only the essential relationships and dependencies. <I>tred</I> is particularly useful for visualizing complex hierarchies or workflows where direct connections might obscure underlying multi-step paths. When cycles are present, <I>tred</I> can treat them specially, for instance, by reducing each cycle to a single edge if the <B>-c</B> option is used. It's a powerful tool for graph simplification and analysis within the Graphviz ecosystem.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>tred</i> is part of the <B>Graphviz</B> package, not a standard core Linux utility. Its functionality is specifically designed for directed graphs described in the <B>DOT language</B>. The output graph's structure, especially regarding cycles, can be nuanced. If cycles are present and <B>-c</B> is not used, <I>tred</I> will behave as if it's processing a DAG (Directed Acyclic Graph) and might not produce the expected reduction for cyclic components. The transitive reduction of a graph with cycles is not always unique.


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
<i>tred</i> exclusively operates on graphs described in the <B>DOT language</B>. Input files (or stdin) must conform to DOT syntax, and the output is also a DOT graph description, making it seamlessly compatible with other Graphviz tools like <I>dot</I> or <I>neato</I> for rendering.


title: UNDERSTANDING TRANSITIVE REDUCTION
content:
Transitive reduction is the process of removing redundant edges from a directed graph. An edge (u, v) is redundant if there exists a path from u to v that does not use the direct edge (u, v). The resulting graph, while having fewer edges, preserves all reachability relationships of the original graph. This means if you can get from A to B in the original graph, you can still get from A to B in the transitively reduced graph, possibly through a longer path.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tred</i> is an integral component of the <B>Graphviz</B> open-source graph visualization software package, originally developed at <B>AT&T Labs Research</B>. Its development is tied directly to the evolution of Graphviz, providing a specialized utility for graph simplification since the early days of the project. It embodies fundamental graph theory concepts, making it a stable and long-standing tool within the Graphviz suite for graph analysis and preparation for visualization.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;All files are listed, including hidden files (those starting with a dot '.').<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List directories only, effectively showing only the directory structure.<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the full path prefix for each file and directory.<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Makes tree not print the indentation lines, useful for large outputs or specific parsers.<br><br><b>-L level</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Descend only 'level' directories deep. 'level' is an integer.<br><br><b>-P pattern</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List only those files that match the wildcard 'pattern'. Directories are still printed.<br><br><b>-I pattern</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not list files that match the wildcard 'pattern'.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the file type and permissions for each file as in `ls -l`.<br><br><b>-u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the username (or UID if no username found) of the file owner.<br><br><b>-g</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the group name (or GID if no group name found) of the file owner.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the size of each file in bytes.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the size of each file in a human-readable format (e.g., K, M, G).<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the date of last modification for each file.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sorts the output by last modification time, newest first.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse the order of the sort.<br><br><b>-F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends a '/' for directories, '*' for executables, '@' for symbolic links, etc., to file names.<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Turn colorization on. This is usually the default when outputting to a TTY.<br><br><b>--noreport</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Omits the final report of the number of directories and files generated.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tree</b> command is a powerful and intuitive utility in Linux and Unix-like systems, designed to display the contents of directories in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. It provides a visual representation of the file system, showing directories, subdirectories, and files in an indented format that clearly illustrates their relationships. Unlike the <b>ls</b> command which typically lists contents of a single directory, <b>tree</b> recursively traverses the specified path, presenting a comprehensive overview of the entire directory tree. This makes it invaluable for understanding complex file structures, documenting project layouts, or quickly locating files without navigating through each directory individually. It supports various options for controlling the depth of traversal, displaying file permissions, sizes, modification dates, and even filtering files based on patterns, making it a versatile tool for system administrators, developers, and general users alike.


title: CAVEATS
content:
1. <b>Performance on large directories:</b> Running <b>tree</b> on very large directory structures (e.g., / or /usr) without a depth limit (<i>-L</i>) can consume significant time and resources, potentially filling the terminal buffer.<br>2. <b>Network mounts:</b> Performance can degrade significantly when traversing directories on slow network file systems (NFS, SMB).<br>3. <b>Overwhelming output:</b> For deep or wide directory trees, the output can be extremely long and difficult to parse visually without filters or depth limits.<br>4. <b>Default behavior:</b> By default, <b>tree</b> does not show hidden files (those starting with a dot '.' on Unix-like systems) unless the <i>-a</i> option is specified.


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
Beyond standard text output, <b>tree</b> supports generating output in various structured formats, making it useful for scripting and integration with other tools:<br><b>-H:</b> HTML output, creating a valid HTML file with clickable links.<br><b>-J:</b> JSON output, representing the directory structure as a JSON array.<br><b>-X:</b> XML output, generating an XML document.


title: SYMBOLIC LINKS
content:
By default, <b>tree</b> follows symbolic links to directories. To prevent this and only list the link itself, use the <i>-l</i> option (follow symbolic links as files). To cross file system boundaries and not descend into directories mounted on different file systems, use the <i>-x</i> option.


title: USEFUL COMBINATIONS
content:
The true power of <b>tree</b> lies in combining its options:<br><b>tree -L 2 -d:</b> Lists directories only, up to 2 levels deep.<br><b>tree -a -s -h:</b> Shows all files (including hidden), their human-readable sizes.<br><b>tree -I 'node_modules|*.log':</b> Excludes specific directories or file types.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tree</b> command was originally developed by <i>Steve Baker</i> in 1996. It was created to provide a more intuitive and visually appealing way to list directory contents compared to traditional commands like <b>ls -R</b>. Its simplicity, effectiveness, and ability to clearly represent file system hierarchy quickly led to its widespread adoption. <b>tree</b> is now a standard utility available in most Linux distributions and Unix-like operating systems, often included by default or easily installable via package managers. Its core functionality has remained consistent, focusing on providing a clear, depth-indented view of files and directories.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>treetime</b> [--tree <i>tree.nwk</i>] [--aln <i>alignment.fasta</i>] [--dates <i>dates.csv</i>] [--outdir <i>results/</i>] [<i>options</i>]<br><br>Alternatively, <b>treetime</b> also functions with subcommands for specific tasks:<br><b>treetime</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--tree <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the input phylogenetic tree file in Newick format.<br><br><b>--aln <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the input multiple sequence alignment file in FASTA format.<br><br><b>--dates <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to a CSV or TSV file containing sequence names and their collection dates.<br><br><b>--outdir <i>&lt;directory&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the directory where all output files and plots will be stored.<br><br><b>--reroot <i>&lt;node_name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reroot the tree at the specified sequence name or node ID. Optimal rerooting is done if not specified.<br><br><b>--keep-root</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevent <i>treetime</i> from rerooting the input tree, keeping its original root.<br><br><b>--clock-rate <i>&lt;float&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a fixed molecular clock rate instead of estimating it from the data.<br><br><b>--do-coalescent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Incorporate a coalescent prior into the branch length optimization, useful for population dynamics.<br><br><b>--relax <i>&lt;value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a relaxed molecular clock model, allowing for rate variation across branches. The value indicates the degree of relaxation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>treetime</i> is a powerful Python-based bioinformatics tool designed for inferring time-stamped phylogenies from genetic sequence data. It takes a phylogenetic tree, a multiple sequence alignment, and collection dates for the sequences as input. The primary goal of <i>treetime</i> is to estimate the molecular clock, reconstruct ancestral sequences, and provide a time-resolved tree, allowing for insights into evolutionary rates and temporal relationships.<br><br>It employs a maximum-likelihood framework, efficiently accounting for varying substitution rates across the tree and along the genome. <i>treetime</i> is particularly useful in evolutionary biology and epidemiology for analyzing rapidly evolving pathogens, where understanding the timing of evolutionary events and transmission dynamics is crucial. It can handle noisy data, provide confidence intervals for age estimates, and supports various clock models, making it a flexible tool for robust phylogenetic dating.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>treetime</i> relies on accurately dated tip sequences for reliable molecular clock estimation; inaccuracies in dates can lead to misleading results. Its computational demands can be significant for extremely large datasets (thousands of sequences), potentially requiring substantial memory and processing time. The quality and diversity of input data directly impact the accuracy of the temporal inferences. It's crucial to ensure clean alignments and correct date formats. While powerful, <i>treetime</i> is not a substitute for initial phylogenetic inference (e.g., building the input tree) or multiple sequence alignment; these steps must typically be performed beforehand.


title: SUBCOMMANDS AND WORKFLOWS
content:
<i>treetime</i> can be run as a single comprehensive command (often via the <b>configure</b> subcommand implicitly or explicitly), or through individual subcommands for specific analytical tasks. For instance, <b>treetime ancestral</b> reconstructs ancestral sequences, <b>treetime clock</b> estimates molecular clock parameters, and <b>treetime plot</b> visualizes results. This modularity allows for fine-grained control over the analysis pipeline and troubleshooting specific steps.


title: OUTPUT FILES
content:
The command typically generates several output files within the specified <i>--outdir</i>. Common outputs include a time-resolved Newick tree file with dated nodes and branches, reconstructed ancestral sequences in FASTA format, a JSON file suitable for visualization platforms like Auspice, and various plots (e.g., root-to-tip regression, clock deviation) that help interpret the results of the molecular clock analysis.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>treetime</i> was developed by the Neherlab, a research group focusing on computational evolutionary biology and epidemiology, particularly at the Biozentrum, University of Basel. Its development was driven by the need for efficient and accurate phylogenetic dating tools to analyze large and rapidly evolving viral pathogens, such as influenza and SARS-CoV-2. As a Python-based open-source project, <i>treetime</i> leverages scientific libraries to provide a flexible and extensible framework for time-resolved phylogenetics. Its widespread adoption highlights its utility in epidemiological surveillance and evolutionary studies.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the saved high score list from previous games and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>trek</b> command launches a classic text-based computer game, often found within the <i>bsdgames</i> package on Linux and Unix-like systems. It simulates commanding a starship (frequently the USS Enterprise) on a mission to rid the galaxy of hostile Klingon invaders. Players navigate a grid-based galaxy, manage ship resources like energy, photon torpedoes, and phasers, and make strategic decisions to locate and destroy enemies, explore quadrants, and dock at starbases for repairs and resupply.<br><br>The game is turn-based and interactive, prompting the user for commands such as 'move', 'fire', 'dock', or 'shield'. Despite its simple text interface, <b>trek</b> offers a surprisingly deep and engaging strategic experience, requiring players to balance exploration, combat, and resource management to successfully complete their mission. It's a nostalgic journey into early computer gaming.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>trek</b> command is a game, not a system utility, and is typically part of the <i>bsdgames</i> package, which may not be installed by default on all Linux distributions. Its gameplay is entirely text-based and relies on interactive prompts for user input. Variations of the 'trek' game exist, and the specific version and its features (like available options) can vary depending on the package and operating system.


title: GAMEPLAY BASICS
content:
Players control their starship through a galaxy divided into an 8x8 grid of quadrants. Each quadrant can contain stars, starbases, and Klingon vessels. Commands are entered interactively at the 'Command?' prompt. Key commands often include:<br><i>srscan</i> (short-range scan of current quadrant)<br><i>lrscan</i> (long-range scan of galaxy)<br><i>move</i> (warp to another quadrant)<br><i>fire</i> (use phasers or photon torpedoes)<br><i>dock</i> (at a starbase for repairs and resupply)<br><i>shields</i> (raise/lower shields)<br><i>status</i> (display ship status)<br><i>quit</i> (exit the game)


title: HISTORY
content:
The original Star Trek game, upon which the Unix <b>trek</b> is based, was created by Mike Mayfield in 1971 for the SDS Sigma 7 mainframe computer. Its immense popularity led to numerous ports and variations across various computing platforms throughout the 1970s and beyond. The version commonly found in Unix-like systems' <i>bsdgames</i> package is a direct descendant of these early implementations, preserving the classic text-based gameplay. It represents a significant piece of early interactive computing history, demonstrating complex simulations with minimal graphical capabilities.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-n, --dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly specifies a dry-run mode. This is the default behavior of <b>trial</b>.<br><br><b>-o <file>, --output-file <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects the simulated standard output of the command to the specified file.<br><br><b>-e <file>, --error-file <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects the simulated standard error of the command to the specified file.<br><br><b>-r, --report-resources</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays an estimated report of CPU usage, memory consumption, and potential disk I/O for the simulated execution.<br><br><b>-s <path>, --sandbox-path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a temporary directory to be used as the root for the simulated filesystem environment. Default is a system temporary directory.<br><br><b>--no-network</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Simulates an environment where the command has no access to network interfaces.<br><br><b>--no-disk-write</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Simulates a read-only filesystem environment, preventing any simulated write operations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>trial</b> command is a conceptual utility designed to execute a specified command or script within a controlled, simulated environment. This 'dry run' mode is invaluable for observing the potential impact, output, or resource consumption of a command before running it in a production or live setting where unintended changes might be undesirable or destructive. It captures standard output (<i>stdout</i>), standard error (<i>stderr</i>), and can optionally report on estimated resource usage (CPU, memory, disk I/O) without actually modifying the filesystem or system state. <b>trial</b> aims to provide a safe space for testing complex operations, allowing users to confidently preview the effects of commands like <b>rm -rf</b>, <b>mv</b>, or <b>apt install</b> before committing to them. It's an indispensable tool for script debugging, pre-deployment validation, and understanding system behavior in a risk-free manner.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><br>IMPORTANT DISCLAIMER:<br>The 'trial' command described here is a conceptual and fictional Linux command. There is no standard 'trial' command available in typical Linux distributions. This description is provided to demonstrate the requested JSON structure and content formatting based on a plausible utility.</b><br><br>As a simulation, <b>trial</b> cannot perfectly replicate all real-world interactions, especially those involving kernel-level changes, complex network timing, or external service dependencies. Resource usage reports are always estimates and may not reflect exact real-world consumption. The effectiveness of the simulation heavily depends on its underlying implementation, which for a generic 'trial' command, would be highly complex.


title: SIMULATION GRANULARITY
content:
The depth of <b>trial</b>'s simulation would depend on its implementation. It could range from simple parsing and reporting to advanced containerization (e.g., using technologies like <i>namespaces</i> or <i>seccomp</i>) to intercept and control system calls, providing a highly isolated environment for the 'trialed' command.


title: USE CASES
content:
Beyond general testing, <b>trial</b> would be invaluable for:<br><ul><li>Debugging complex shell scripts.</li><li>Previewing changes from configuration management tools.</li><li>Validating file permissions or access patterns.</li><li>Estimating resource needs for capacity planning.</li><li>Education and training for new users to safely explore commands.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
While <b>trial</b> is presented here as a conceptual command, the underlying need for 'dry run' capabilities has profoundly influenced the design of many real-world Linux utilities. Developers have often incorporated --dry-run, --simulate, or --check options directly into commands like <b>rsync</b>, <b>apt</b>, <b>mv</b>, and <b>rm</b> to provide a preview of their actions without actual execution. The idea of a universal command, like <b>trial</b>, that could wrap <i>any</i> arbitrary command execution in a safe, inspectable, and reversible environment, represents a long-standing aspiration in system administration and software development. Such a utility would streamline testing workflows, enhance security by preventing unintended side effects, and foster greater confidence in complex system operations, though its generic implementation poses significant technical challenges.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
test(1), strace(1), time(1), rm(1) (with --dry-run concept), mv(1) (with --dry-run concept), apt(8) (with --simulate concept)


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>trivy</b> <<i>target</i>> [<i>options</i>]<br>Common targets include: <i>image</i>, <i>fs</i>, <i>repo</i>, <i>config</i>, <i>kubernetes</i>, <i>cloud</i>.<br><br>Examples:<br><i>trivy image <b>nginx:latest</b></i><br><i>trivy fs <b>.</b></i><br><i>trivy repo <b>https://github.com/aquasecurity/trivy-repo-test.git</b></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b>, <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help message for the command or a subcommand.<br><br><b><b>--version</b>, <b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the current version of <b>Trivy</b>.<br><br><b><b>--severity</b> <<i>SEVERITY</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify vulnerability severities to report (e.g., <i>UNKNOWN, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, CRITICAL</i>). Multiple severities can be comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>--format</b> <<i>FORMAT</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Choose the output format for the report (e.g., <i>table, json, cyclonedx, spdx, template</i>).<br><br><b><b>--output</b> <<i>FILEPATH</i>>, <b>-o</b> <<i>FILEPATH</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write the scan report to a specified file instead of standard output.<br><br><b><b>--ignore-unfixed</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only display vulnerabilities for which a fix is available.<br><br><b><b>--vuln-type</b> <<i>TYPE</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the types of vulnerabilities to scan (e.g., <i>os, library</i>). Multiple types can be comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>--secret</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable secret scanning to detect hardcoded secrets.<br><br><b><b>--config-scanners</b> <<i>SCANNERS</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable misconfiguration scanners for various targets (e.g., <i>misconfig, rbac</i>).<br><br><b><b>--timeout</b> <<i>DURATION</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a timeout for the scan operation (e.g., <i>5m, 1h30m</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>Trivy</b> is a versatile and user-friendly open-source security scanner designed to identify vulnerabilities, misconfigurations, secrets, and licenses across a wide range of targets. It supports scanning container images, local filesystems, Git repositories, Kubernetes clusters, and cloud environments (AWS, Azure, GCP). <b>Trivy</b> detects vulnerabilities in operating system packages (e.g., Alpine, Debian, Ubuntu, RHEL) and application dependencies (e.g., npm, yarn, pip, Composer, Bundler). Beyond traditional vulnerability scanning, it can also enforce security policies by scanning Infrastructure as Code (IaC) files for misconfigurations and detect sensitive information like API keys or passwords. Its ease of integration into CI/CD pipelines makes it an ideal tool for securing the software supply chain from development to deployment. Maintained by Aqua Security, <b>Trivy</b> provides a crucial layer of security for modern cloud-native applications.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Trivy</b> requires an active internet connection for the initial download and subsequent updates of its vulnerability databases, which can be quite large. Scanning large targets or numerous files can be resource-intensive and time-consuming. While highly accurate, like any security tool, false positives or negatives can occur; results should always be reviewed and understood in context. The effectiveness of <b>Trivy</b>'s vulnerability detection is directly tied to the timeliness and comprehensiveness of its vulnerability databases.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<b>Trivy</b> is widely used for: <br>1. <i>CI/CD Integration</i>: Automating vulnerability scans in development pipelines before deployment.<br>2. <i>Container Image Scanning</i>: Identifying vulnerabilities in Docker images and other container artifacts.<br>3. <i>Filesystem Scanning</i>: Analyzing local directories or build artifacts for security issues.<br>4. <i>Configuration Auditing</i>: Scanning Infrastructure as Code (IaC) files (e.g., Terraform, Kubernetes manifests, CloudFormation) for misconfigurations.<br>5. <i>Secret Detection</i>: Finding hardcoded secrets in source code or configuration files.


title: VULNERABILITY DATABASES
content:
<b>Trivy</b> aggregates vulnerability data from multiple sources, including NVD (National Vulnerability Database), OS vendor security advisories (e.g., Debian, Ubuntu, Alpine, RHEL), and language-specific package managers (e.g., npm, Yarn, Bundler, Pip). It maintains a local cache of these databases for faster subsequent scans, which are regularly updated.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Trivy</b> was developed by Aqua Security and first released in 2019. It quickly gained popularity within the cloud-native and container security communities due to its lightweight nature, ease of use, and comprehensive scanning capabilities across a variety of targets. As an open-source project, its development is community-driven, with active contributions ensuring it remains a relevant and effective tool for securing modern software supply chains.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>trizen</b> <I>[options]</I> <I><operation></I> <I>[packages...]</I><br>Common usage examples:<br><b>trizen -Syu</b><br><b>trizen -S</b> <I>&lt;package(s)&gt;</I><br><b>trizen -Ss</b> <I>&lt;keyword&gt;</I><br><b>trizen -R</b> <I>&lt;package(s)&gt;</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-S</b>, <b>--sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronize packages. Used for installing new packages or upgrading existing ones.<br><br><b><b>-Ss</b>, <b>--search</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Search for packages in both official repositories and the <I>AUR</I>.<br><br><b><b>-Syu</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronize and upgrade all packages, including those from official repositories and the <I>AUR</I>.<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--remove</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove specified packages from the system.<br><br><b><b>-Rnsc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove packages, their dependencies, and configuration files, cleaning orphans.<br><br><b><b>-Qdt</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Query for orphaned packages (dependencies not required by any installed package).<br><br><b><b>-G</b>, <b>--getpkgbuild</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Download the <I>PKGBUILD</I> and related files for an <I>AUR</I> package.<br><br><b><b>--noconfirm</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Bypass all confirmation prompts during operations, useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>--skipreview</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically skip the <I>PKGBUILD</I> review prompt when installing <I>AUR</I> packages (use with caution).<br><br><b><b>--m-a</b>, <b>--makepkg-args</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pass custom arguments directly to the underlying <I>makepkg</I> command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>trizen</b> is an <I>AUR helper</I> for <I>Arch Linux</I> that automates the process of building and installing packages from the <I>Arch User Repository</I>. It acts as a wrapper around <I>pacman</I> for official repository packages and provides enhanced functionality for <I>AUR</I> packages, including dependency resolution, interactive build prompts, and support for <I>split packages</I>. Written in <I>Perl</I>, <b>trizen</b> is known for its speed and efficiency. Its features include searching the <I>AUR</I>, installing packages, upgrading <I>AUR</I> and <I>pacman</I> packages, removing orphaned dependencies, and providing a clean interface for managing <I>Arch</I> system software. It aims to simplify the <I>AUR</I> experience for users by handling tasks like <I>PKGBUILD</I> fetching, checksum validation, and compilation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Building packages from the <I>AUR</I> can be resource-intensive and time-consuming.<br>Users should always exercise caution when installing <I>AUR</I> packages, as they are user-submitted and not officially maintained by <I>Arch Linux</I>. Reviewing <I>PKGBUILDs</I> is crucial for security, even though <b>trizen</b> provides options like <b>--skipreview</b> to bypass this step.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<b>trizen</b> allows for user-specific configurations to be set in files, typically <I>~/.config/trizen/trizen.conf</I>. This allows users to set default options, such as automatically skipping <I>PKGBUILD</I> review or setting custom <I>makepkg</I> arguments, without typing them on the command line every time.


title: LANGUAGE
content:
Uniquely, <b>trizen</b> is written in <I>Perl</I>, which contributes to its reputation for being lightweight and fast compared to some other <I>AUR</I> helpers written in different languages.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>trizen</b> emerged as an <I>AUR helper</I> focusing on <I>Perl</I> as its language, offering a lightweight and efficient alternative to some other helpers. Its development aimed to provide a fast and reliable interface for the <I>AUR</I>, integrating <I>pacman</I>'s capabilities seamlessly. It gained popularity for its feature set, including comprehensive <I>AUR</I> search, dependency resolution, and support for <I>split packages</I>, which are common in the <I>AUR</I>. While other helpers like <I>yay</I> and <I>paru</I> have also risen in prominence, <b>trizen</b> maintains its user base due to its unique implementation and specific feature set.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>troff</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>file</i>...]<br><br><i>troff</i> is commonly invoked as part of <b>groff</b>:<br><b>groff</b> [<i>option</i>...] [<i>file</i>...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-T</b> <i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output device or character set. Common values include 'ps' (PostScript), 'dvi', 'html', 'ascii'.<br><br><b><b>-m</b> <i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load the specified macro file (e.g., 'ms', 'me', 'mm') before processing input files. These packages provide higher-level commands for document structure.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>list</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output only the pages specified in <i>list</i>. The list can be a comma-separated sequence of page numbers or ranges (e.g., '1,3-5,7').<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>CN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the number register <i>C</i> (a single character name) to the value <i>N</i> before processing. Used for defining variables.<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read standard input after all specified files have been processed.<br><br><b><b>-z</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress normal output. Useful for checking syntax or defining macros without generating a document.<br><br><b><b>-F</b> <i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Search <i>dir</i> for font files.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Search <i>dir</i> for macro files.<br><br><b><b>-n</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start page numbering at <i>N</i>.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>CS</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Define character <i>C</i> as string <i>S</i>.<br><br><b><i>file</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more input files to be processed. If no files are specified, <b>troff</b> reads from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>troff</i> (short for 'typesetter roff') is a powerful and highly flexible document formatting system developed at Bell Labs. It reads input text mixed with special formatting commands and produces device-independent output, typically used for high-quality typesetting. Unlike its counterpart <i>nroff</i>, which targets terminal output, <i>troff</i> is designed for graphical output devices like laser printers and phototypesetters. Although the original <i>troff</i> is proprietary, the GNU project provides a free re-implementation called <i>groff</i>, which is the version commonly found on Linux systems. <i>troff</i> is foundational to Unix documentation, including man pages, and allows for precise control over layout, fonts, and graphics through its extensive command set and macro capabilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>troff</i> command itself is often an alias or component of the <i>groff</i> suite on modern Linux systems. Direct usage might be limited compared to invoking <i>groff</i> with appropriate options. Mastering <i>troff</i> requires a significant learning curve due to its low-level control and reliance on specific macro packages and preprocessors. Output often requires a separate post-processor (e.g., <i>grops</i> for PostScript) to render the final document.


title: MACRO PACKAGES
content:
<i>troff</i>'s power is significantly extended by macro packages, which are collections of predefined commands that simplify document structure. Common packages include:<br><b>ms</b>: (Manuscript) A general-purpose package for articles and books.<br><b>me</b>: (Memorandum) Designed for memos and technical reports.<br><b>mm</b>: (Memorandum Macros) Another comprehensive package for various documents.<br>These packages abstract away low-level formatting details, allowing users to focus on content.


title: PREPROCESSORS
content:
<i>troff</i> documents often integrate content generated by specialized preprocessors that translate specific syntax into <i>troff</i> commands. This allows for complex elements like equations, tables, and diagrams to be easily included:<br><b>eqn(1)</b>: For mathematical equations.<br><b>tbl(1)</b>: For creating complex tables.<br><b>pic(1)</b>: For drawing simple diagrams.<br><b>refer(1)</b>: For managing bibliographic references.<br>A typical workflow involves piping the output of preprocessors into <i>troff</i>, then piping <i>troff</i>'s output to a post-processor.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>troff</i> originated in the early 1970s at Bell Labs, developed by Joe F. Ossanna and later maintained by Brian W. Kernighan. It was a rewrite of <i>roff</i> (which stood for 'runoff') to support the Graphic Systems CAT phototypesetter, marking a significant leap in document typesetting on Unix systems. <i>troff</i>, along with its text-oriented counterpart <i>nroff</i>, became integral to the Unix operating system's documentation and publishing tools. The original proprietary <i>troff</i> was eventually superseded in the open-source world by <i>groff</i> (GNU <i>roff</i>), a free implementation started by James Clark in 1989, which aimed to be compatible with Bell Labs <i>troff</i> while adding extensions.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b><i>true</i></b> command is a fundamental utility in Unix-like operating systems, including Linux, whose sole purpose is to exit with a successful status code of zero. Despite its apparent simplicity and lack of functional output, it plays a crucial role in shell scripting and conditional logic. Programmers and scriptwriters often leverage <b><i>true</i></b> in contexts where a command's success or failure is the primary concern, rather than its side effects or output. For instance, it is commonly used to create infinite loops (e.g., `while true; do ...; done`), or as a placeholder in conditional statements where a no-operation success is required. Its behavior is precisely the opposite of the <b><i>false</i></b> command, which always exits with a non-zero (unsuccessful) status code. Being part of the GNU core utilities, <b><i>true</i></b> is a reliable and universally available command, making it an indispensable tool for robust shell programming. Its minimalistic design underscores the Unix philosophy of providing small, specialized tools that can be combined to achieve complex tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b><i>true</i></b> command's simplicity means it has very few caveats. Its primary limitation is that it performs no action other than returning an exit status. Users should be aware that it accepts no arguments or options; providing any will usually result in an error or be ignored depending on the specific implementation, although standard implementations like GNU Coreutils' <b><i>true</i></b> do not accept arguments. Attempting to use it for tasks other than providing a success exit status will be ineffective.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
The <b><i>true</i></b> command always exits with a status code of <b>0</b> (zero). In Unix-like systems, an exit status of zero conventionally indicates success, while a non-zero status indicates failure. This consistent success code is the command's defining characteristic and its sole functional output.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b><i>true</i></b> command, along with its counterpart <b><i>false</i></b>, are among the most basic and oldest utilities in the Unix ecosystem. Their origins can be traced back to the early days of Unix and its shell scripting environment. Their existence is a testament to the fundamental need for commands that simply return a specific exit status without performing any other operation, essential for controlling program flow in scripts. As part of the GNU Core Utilities, <b><i>true</i></b> has been a standard component of Linux distributions since their inception, ensuring its universal availability and consistent behavior across various systems. Its simple, singular purpose has remained unchanged over decades, reflecting its enduring utility in the design of robust shell scripts.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-m</b>, <b>--mount</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts the specified encrypted volume to a mount point.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--dismount</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dismounts the specified encrypted volume or all currently mounted volumes.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the TrueCrypt Volume Creation Wizard to create a new encrypted volume.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all currently mounted TrueCrypt volumes.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--text</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs TrueCrypt in text-based user interface mode, suitable for terminals without graphical support.<br><br><b><b>--fs-options=</b><I>options</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies filesystem mount options (e.g., 'rw,uid=1000').<br><br><b><b>--keyfiles=</b><I>file1</I>[<I>,file2</I>...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies one or more keyfiles to use for authentication.<br><br><b><b>--password=</b><I>password</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the volume password non-interactively. <i>Use with caution, as this can expose your password in command history.</i><br><br><b><b>--non-interactive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all interactive prompts, assuming default or specified options.<br><br><b><I>VOLUME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the encrypted volume file or device (e.g., <b>/dev/sdXn</b>, <b>/path/to/volume.tc</b>).<br><br><b><I>MOUNT_POINT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The directory where the encrypted volume should be mounted.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
TrueCrypt was a widely used free and open-source disk encryption software designed to provide on-the-fly encryption for entire disk partitions or storage devices. It also allowed users to create encrypted virtual disk files that operated like regular files but securely stored data. The software supported various encryption algorithms (e.g., AES, Serpent, Twofish) and hash functions, offering a high degree of configurability. TrueCrypt gained significant popularity due to its cross-platform compatibility (Windows, macOS, and Linux) and its perceived robustness in protecting data confidentiality. However, its development ceased abruptly in May 2014, with a warning from the official project website advising against its continued use due to potential security vulnerabilities. As a result, TrueCrypt is no longer recommended for secure data encryption, and users are strongly advised to migrate to actively maintained alternatives like VeraCrypt.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Important Security Warning:</b> TrueCrypt was officially discontinued in 2014 and is no longer maintained. It has not received any security updates since then. The official TrueCrypt website, at the time of discontinuation, explicitly warned that the software 'may contain unfixed security vulnerabilities.' While subsequent independent security audits did not find evidence of a deliberate backdoor, they did identify various vulnerabilities and design weaknesses that confirm its obsolescence. Therefore, the use of TrueCrypt for securing sensitive data is <b>strongly discouraged</b>. Users should migrate to actively maintained and audited alternatives like VeraCrypt to ensure data security and integrity.


title: LEGACY USE AND MIGRATION
content:
While TrueCrypt is considered obsolete and insecure for new encryption, it may still be encountered on older systems for accessing existing encrypted volumes. It is crucial to understand that continued use for sensitive data protection is highly insecure due to the lack of updates and known vulnerabilities. Users with existing TrueCrypt volumes are strongly advised to decrypt their data and re-encrypt it using a modern, actively maintained encryption solution such as VeraCrypt, or native operating system encryption tools like LUKS with cryptsetup on Linux. This migration is essential to mitigate potential security risks.


title: HISTORY
content:
TrueCrypt was first released around 2004 and rapidly gained traction as a robust, open-source disk encryption solution. Its ability to encrypt entire partitions, devices, or create hidden volumes, coupled with its cross-platform compatibility, made it a go-to tool for privacy-conscious users. However, in May 2014, the TrueCrypt development team abruptly ceased all activity, posting a cryptic message on their official website stating that the software was 'not secure' and recommending users migrate to BitLocker (on Windows). This sudden and unexplained discontinuation, along with the ambiguous warning, led to widespread concern and speculation within the security community. Although subsequent independent security audits did not confirm a 'backdoor,' they did identify various flaws and design concerns. The cessation of TrueCrypt's development directly led to the creation of forks and successors, most notably VeraCrypt, which aimed to audit, fix, and continue the project's legacy with active maintenance and transparent development.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>if</B> <I>condition-commands</I><B>;</B> <B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands-if-true</I><br>[<B>elif</B> <I>another-condition-commands</I><B>;</B> <B>then</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands-if-another-true</I>]...<br>[<B>else</B><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>commands-if-false</I>]<br><B>fi</B>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The word 'then' is not a standalone Linux command or executable program. Instead, it is a fundamental <I>keyword</I> in various Unix-like shell scripting languages, including Bash, Zsh, and Ksh. Its primary role is to mark the beginning of a command block that should be executed when a preceding condition evaluates to true within an <I>if</I> or <I>elif</I> statement. It serves as a syntactic separator, indicating that the condition has ended and the commands to be performed should follow. Without 'then', shell conditional constructs would be syntactically incomplete and result in errors. It ensures clarity and structure in shell scripts, allowing for proper flow control based on the outcomes of evaluations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
&bull; <B>Not a standalone command:</B> 'then' is a shell keyword and cannot be executed independently from a shell script or a shell prompt.<br>&bull; <B>Syntax Requirement:</B> It must immediately follow a command or command list that constitutes a condition, separated by a semicolon (<B>;</B>) or a newline.<br>&bull; <B>Context-Specific:</B> 'then' is primarily used with <I>if</I> and <I>elif</I> conditional statements. It is not used with <I>for</I> or <I>while</I> loops, which use the <B>do</B> keyword instead.


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
Here are common examples demonstrating the use of <B>then</B> in shell scripts:<br><br><b>Simple If-Then:</b><br>if grep -q "hello" file.txt;<br>then<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "'hello' found!";<br>fi<br><br><b>If-Then-Else:</b><br>if [ -f "myfile.txt" ];<br>then<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "File exists.";<br>else<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "File does not exist.";<br>fi<br><br><b>If-Then-Elif-Then-Else:</b><br>if ping -c 1 8.8.8.8 &>/dev/null;<br>then<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "Internet is reachable.";<br>elif command -v curl &>/dev/null;<br>then<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "Curl is installed.";<br>else<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;echo "Neither Internet nor Curl.";<br>fi


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of 'then' as a keyword to introduce conditional blocks has been an integral part of Unix shell syntax since the original <I>Bourne shell (sh)</I> was introduced in 1979. Its design was influenced by programming languages that use similar constructs for flow control. Over the decades, as various shells like <I>Korn shell (ksh)</I>, <I>GNU Bash</I>, and <I>Zsh</I> emerged and evolved, the fundamental role and syntax of 'then' remained consistent, underscoring its foundational importance in shell scripting paradigms.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>add &lt;pkg&gt;...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds one or more TeX Live packages to the pinned list, preventing them from being updated.<br><br><b>remove &lt;pkg&gt;...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes one or more TeX Live packages from the pinned list, allowing them to be updated again.<br><br><b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays all TeX Live packages currently configured as pinned.<br><br><b>--repository &lt;url|path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative package repository URL or local path for the operation, overriding the default.<br><br><b>--location &lt;url|path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An alias for <i>--repository</i>, specifying an alternative package source.<br><br><b>--all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies the command to all available TeX Live packages, though less commonly used directly with pinning subcommands.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Pinning in TeX Live, managed by <i>tlmgr-pinning</i>, allows users to fix specific TeX Live packages to their current installed versions, preventing them from being updated during a <i>tlmgr update</i> operation. This functionality is crucial for maintaining a stable and reproducible TeX environment, especially in scenarios where specific package behaviors or functionalities are required that might change in newer versions.<br><br>For instance, an older TeX document might rely on a particular bug or feature that was later removed or altered. By pinning a package, users can avoid unintended breakages or regressions in their compiled documents. The <i>tlmgr-pinning</i> command provides subcommands to add packages to the pinned list, remove them, or display the current list of pinned packages, offering fine-grained control over the TeX Live installation's update behavior.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Pinning packages can prevent important security fixes and bug patches from being applied, potentially leaving your TeX Live installation vulnerable or with known issues. It can also lead to dependency conflicts if other unpinned packages update and expect newer versions of the pinned packages. Use this feature judiciously and only when absolutely necessary for specific compatibility requirements or reproducible build environments.


title: <B>IMPACT ON TLMGR UPDATE</B>
content:
When a package is pinned using <i>tlmgr-pinning</i>, the <i>tlmgr update</i> command will automatically skip it. This ensures that the pinned package's version remains unchanged, even if newer versions are available in the TeX Live repository. To allow a pinned package to be updated, it must first be explicitly removed from the pinned list using the <i>tlmgr pinning remove</i> command.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of package pinning is a common feature in many package management systems, designed to address the need for stability and reproducibility in software environments. Its inclusion in <i>tlmgr</i> reflects the evolving requirements of TeX Live users who need precise control over their installed packages, especially for long-term projects or specific document compilation workflows. <i>tlmgr</i> itself was introduced to provide a robust, unified command-line interface for TeX Live management, replacing older, less integrated methods. The pinning feature enhances <i>tlmgr</i>'s capability to manage complex dependency scenarios and maintain specific software baselines.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
While "tlmgr-platform" is not a direct executable command, its functionalities are integrated into the <code>tlmgr</code> utility. The concept is often utilized implicitly by <code>tlmgr</code> or explicitly through options:<br><br><b><code>tlmgr &lt;action&gt; [<i>options</i>] [<i>package-name</i>[<i>-PLATFORM_SUFFIX</i>]]</code></b><br><b><code>tlmgr option --platform <i>platform_string</i></code></b><br><b><code>tlmgr install <i>package-name</i>[<i>-platform_string</i>]</code></b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><code>--platform=<I>platform_string</I></code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with various <code>tlmgr</code> commands (e.g., <code>update</code>, <code>install</code>, <code>option</code>) to specify the target platform. A <code>platform_string</code> identifies a specific OS and architecture (e.g., <code>x86_64-linux</code>, <code>win32</code>, <code>universal-darwin</code>). When used with <code>option</code>, it sets the default platform for future operations.<br><br><b><code>--list-platform-files</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Used with <code>tlmgr info</code>) Lists files specifically associated with the current or specified platform for a given package.<br><br><b><code>--only-platform</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Used with <code>tlmgr list</code>) Filters the output to show only platform-specific packages.<br><br><b><code>-platform_suffix</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Not a command-line option, but a common suffix appended to binary package names (e.g., <code>collection-luatex-bin-x86_64-linux</code>) to indicate the platform for which the binary is compiled. <code>tlmgr</code> uses this suffix to select the correct package.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term "tlmgr-platform" refers not to a standalone command, but to the crucial concept within the TeX Live Manager (<code>tlmgr</code>) for handling platform-dependent software components. TeX Live provides a comprehensive distribution of TeX and related programs. Many of these programs are compiled binaries that are specific to a particular operating system and CPU architecture (e.g., Linux on x86_64, Windows on i386, macOS on arm64). <br><br> "tlmgr-platform" encompasses the mechanism by which <code>tlmgr</code> identifies, installs, updates, and manages these platform-specific packages. This ensures that users receive the correct binaries for their system, maintaining compatibility and proper functionality. For instance, when installing a package like <code>luatex-bin</code>, <code>tlmgr</code> automatically selects the version compiled for the detected platform, such as <code>luatex-bin-x86_64-linux</code> or <code>luatex-bin-win32</code>. Users can also explicitly specify platforms for advanced scenarios.


title: CAVEATS
content:
"tlmgr-platform" is not a standalone command; it represents the platform-management aspect of the <code>tlmgr</code> utility. Misunderstanding or incorrectly specifying platform options can lead to installation issues, incompatible binaries, or a broken TeX Live environment. Users should generally allow <code>tlmgr</code> to auto-detect the platform unless specific cross-platform management is required.


title: PLATFORM STRING DEFINITION
content:
A "platform string" is a concise identifier specifying an operating system and its architecture. Examples include <code>x86_64-linux</code> (64-bit Linux), <code>i386-linux</code> (32-bit Linux), <code>win32</code> (32-bit Windows, also used for 64-bit systems), <code>universal-darwin</code> (macOS, for Intel and ARM binaries). <code>tlmgr</code> uses this string to match packages to the user's system.


title: AUTO-DETECTION VS. MANUAL SPECIFICATION
content:
By default, <code>tlmgr</code> automatically detects the current system's platform and installs or updates corresponding binaries. Manual specification using <code>--platform</code> is typically reserved for advanced use cases, such as preparing an installation for a different architecture (e.g., building a TeX Live installation for a server from a client machine).


title: HISTORY
content:
The need for "tlmgr-platform" capabilities arose with the increasing diversity of operating systems and CPU architectures on which TeX Live is deployed. As TeX Live evolved from its earlier distribution methods (e.g., manual installation, older update scripts), <code>tlmgr</code> was developed to provide a robust, cross-platform package management solution. The <code>platform</code> concept was integral to <code>tlmgr</code> from its inception, allowing a single distribution to serve users on Linux, Windows, macOS, and various other Unix-like systems, ensuring that correct compiled binaries are delivered to the appropriate environments. This modular approach significantly simplified maintenance and distribution.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tlmgr</b> <b>search</b> [<i>option</i>...] &lt;<i>pattern</i>&gt;<br>Example: <b>tlmgr</b> <b>search</b> --file report.cls<br>Example: <b>tlmgr</b> <b>search</b> --description "graphics"


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The regular expression or string to search for. This is the core search query.<br><br><b>--file <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches for files whose names or paths match the provided <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i>. Useful for finding which package provides a specific file.<br><br><b>--description <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches within the long descriptions of TeX Live packages for the given <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i>. This helps in discovering packages by their functionality.<br><br><b>--global</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches the remote TeX Live package repository. Often synonymous with <i>--remote</i>. This is typically the default for description searches.<br><br><b>--local</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches only the currently installed TeX Live packages on your system. Useful for checking what's already present.<br><br><b>--all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Combines <i>--local</i> and <i>--global</i> (or <i>--remote</i>) to search both the local installation and the remote repository.<br><br><b>--list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For each matching package, lists all files (when used with <i>--file</i>) or the full description (when used with <i>--description</i>), instead of just the package name.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides more detailed output, potentially showing additional information about matches and the search process.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a concise help message for the <b>tlmgr search</b> command, outlining its options and usage.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information for <b>tlmgr</b>, which applies to the <b>search</b> subcommand as well.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tlmgr search</b> is a vital subcommand of the TeX Live Manager, <b>tlmgr</b>, designed for efficient discovery within the extensive TeX Live distribution. It empowers users to search for specific packages, files provided by packages, or even package descriptions. This command is invaluable for identifying which package contains a particular <i>.sty</i> or <i>.cls</i> file, locating packages relevant to a specific LaTeX topic, or confirming the availability of software within TeX Live. Depending on the options used, <b>tlmgr search</b> can query your locally installed TeX Live tree or the remote TeX Live repository, making it a flexible tool for both installed and available content. Its regex-enabled pattern matching allows for precise and powerful searches.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>tlmgr search</b> can yield extensive results, especially with broad or common patterns, which might require careful parsing.<br>Searches involving <i>--global</i> or <i>--remote</i> naturally require an active internet connection to query the TeX Live mirrors.<br>Patterns are typically interpreted as Perl-compatible regular expressions (PCREs); ensure correct syntax and proper shell escaping for special characters to avoid unexpected behavior.<br>Performance can vary significantly based on network speed and the current load on the CTAN mirrors.


title: SEARCH SCOPE BEHAVIOR
content:
Understanding the search scope is crucial. By default, <b>tlmgr search --file</b> often searches locally, while <b>tlmgr search --description</b> defaults to remote. Using <b>--local</b>, <b>--global</b> (or <b>--remote</b>), or <b>--all</b> explicitly controls whether the command queries your installed TeX Live tree, the online repository, or both respectively. This distinction is vital for finding both installed and available packages.


title: REGULAR EXPRESSION SUPPORT
content:
The <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i> argument in <b>tlmgr search</b> commands is interpreted as a Perl-compatible regular expression (PCRE). This allows for powerful and flexible matching, but users should be familiar with regex syntax. For simple string searches, literal patterns usually work, but for complex queries (e.g., matching start/end of line, specific character sets), full regex capabilities can be utilized.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tlmgr</b> utility, which encapsulates <b>search</b>, was introduced to centralize the management of TeX Live, succeeding older, more disparate tools like <i>texconfig</i> and <i>updmap</i>. The <b>search</b> subcommand has been a foundational part of <b>tlmgr</b> since its early versions, evolving to support more flexible search scopes (local vs. remote) and types (file, description). Its development reflects the need for users to easily navigate and identify components within the ever-expanding TeX Live distribution, ensuring efficient package discovery and problem-solving.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>None</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <i>tlmgr-shell</i> command itself does not accept direct command-line parameters or options upon invocation. All operations and their respective parameters are executed interactively once the shell is launched.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tlmgr-shell</b> command provides an interactive command-line interface for managing a TeX Live installation. It is a powerful subcommand within the <i>tlmgr</i> (TeX Live Manager) utility that allows users to perform a wide range of tasks related to TeX Live packages and configurations without repeatedly invoking the main <i>tlmgr</i> command.<br>Within this interactive mode, users can seamlessly install new packages, update existing ones, remove unnecessary packages, search for specific packages, manage TeX Live repositories, and configure various TeX Live options. This interactive environment is particularly beneficial for executing multiple operations in sequence, exploring available options, and leveraging features like tab-completion (where supported by the user's shell environment). It serves as a central, persistent hub for maintaining a healthy and up-to-date TeX Live distribution.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Root Privileges</b>: Many operations, especially installing, updating, or removing system-wide packages, require administrative (root) privileges.<br><b>Internet Connection</b>: Updating or installing new packages typically requires an active internet connection to download data from TeX Live repositories.<br><b>Exit Command</b>: Users must remember to type <i>quit</i> or <i>exit</i> to properly terminate the interactive shell session.<br><b>Complexity</b>: While providing convenience, mastering all <i>tlmgr</i> commands and their options within the shell can still be complex for new users.


title: <B>COMMON INTERACTIVE COMMANDS</B>
content:
Once inside the <i>tlmgr-shell</i> prompt, users can execute various <i>tlmgr</i> subcommands without repeatedly typing <i>tlmgr</i>. Some frequently used commands within the interactive shell include:<br><b>install</b> <i>package-name</i>: Installs a new TeX Live package.<br><b>update</b> <i>[--all]</i>: Updates all installed packages or specific ones.<br><b>remove</b> <i>package-name</i>: Removes an installed package.<br><b>search</b> <i>pattern</i>: Searches for packages matching a given pattern.<br><b>option</b> <i>key [value]</i>: Sets or displays configuration options for TeX Live.<br><b>repository</b> <i>add|remove|list</i>: Manages TeX Live package repositories.<br><b>help</b> <i>[command]</i>: Displays help for specific commands or general help.<br><b>quit</b> / <b>exit</b>: Exits the interactive shell session.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>tlmgr</i> (TeX Live Manager) utility was developed as a unified, cross-platform replacement for older TeX Live management tools like <i>teXconfig</i>. Its introduction marked a significant step towards modernizing the process of installing, updating, and managing TeX Live distributions. The <b>shell</b> subcommand has been an integral part of <i>tlmgr</i> since its early versions, offering an interactive environment that streamlines multiple management tasks and provides a more persistent context for users, evolving alongside the broader capabilities of <i>tlmgr</i> itself.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>start</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the TLP daemon and applies power-saving settings according to the configuration. Typically run automatically at boot.<br><br><b><b>stop</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops the TLP daemon and reverts settings to system defaults. Power management will no longer be handled by TLP.<br><br><b><b>reapply</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reapplies TLP settings without stopping/starting the daemon. Useful after modifying the configuration file (<code>/etc/tlp.conf</code>).<br><br><b><b>stat</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current TLP status, applied configuration, and actual power-saving settings for all components. Essential for debugging and verifying TLP's operation.<br><br><b><b>bat</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Immediately switches to battery power-saving settings, overriding the current power source detection. Useful for testing or forcing a low-power state.<br><br><b><b>ac</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Immediately switches to AC power settings, overriding the current power source detection. Useful for testing or forcing a high-performance state.<br><br><b><b>disk</b> [<i>ID</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages power management for hard disk drives and solid-state drives. When an optional <i>ID</i> (e.g., 'sda') is provided, it shows or applies settings for that specific disk. Without an <i>ID</i>, it displays information for all detected disks.<br><br><b><b>usb</b> [<i>ID</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages USB autosuspend behavior. With an optional <i>ID</i>, it shows or applies settings for a specific USB device. Without an <i>ID</i>, it displays information for all connected USB devices.<br><br><b><b>fullcharge</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instructs the battery to charge to its full capacity (100%), temporarily ignoring any configured charge thresholds. This command is effective only on supported batteries.<br><br><b><b>chargeonce</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Charges the battery once to the configured charge threshold and then stops. Useful for maintaining battery health by preventing constant charging.<br><br><b><b>true</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables TLP's systemd service, ensuring it starts automatically on boot. This is typically the default state after installation.<br><br><b><b>false</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables TLP's systemd service, preventing it from starting automatically. TLP will not manage power saving until re-enabled.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tlp</i> is an advanced power management command-line tool for Linux, primarily designed to optimize battery life and reduce power consumption on laptops.<br><br>It automatically applies a wide range of power-saving settings to your hardware, including CPU, disk, kernel, WiFi, Bluetooth, and USB devices, depending on whether your system is running on AC power or battery. <i>tlp</i> aims to provide out-of-the-box power savings without requiring deep technical knowledge, offering sensible defaults that can be further customized via its configuration file (<code>/etc/tlp.conf</code>). It works by applying settings at startup and dynamically adjusting them when power sources change, making it a powerful utility for enhancing laptop endurance and efficiency.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>tlp</i> operates by applying system-wide settings, which may conflict with other power management utilities like <i>tuned</i> or <i>powertop</i>'s auto-tune mode. It is generally recommended to use only one primary power management solution to prevent erratic behavior or performance issues. Users might need to customize settings in <code>/etc/tlp.conf</code> to achieve optimal results for their specific hardware, especially for niche devices or to address specific power-saving needs. Always review the output of <b>tlp stat</b> after making changes or experiencing issues.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
<i>tlp</i>'s behavior is extensively controlled via its main configuration file, <code>/etc/tlp.conf</code>. This plain-text file allows users to fine-tune a multitude of power-saving settings for various components (e.g., CPU governors, disk advanced power management, WiFi power saving, battery charge thresholds) and define different behaviors for AC and battery power sources. After editing, it's crucial to reapply settings using <b>tlp reapply</b> or restart the TLP service.


title: DAEMON OPERATION
content:
<i>tlp</i> functions as a system daemon, meaning it runs continuously in the background as a system service. It starts automatically at boot and actively monitors for changes in the power source (e.g., plugging/unplugging AC adapter), dynamically applying the appropriate power profiles (AC or battery) as configured. This ensures persistent and automatic power optimization without requiring manual intervention from the user.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tlp</i> emerged as a highly effective and popular power management tool within the Linux community, initially gaining prominence for its exceptional performance on ThinkPad laptops due to its ability to leverage specific hardware features. Its development aimed to provide a comprehensive, automated, and easily configurable solution for optimizing battery life and reducing power consumption. Over time, its scope broadened to support a wide array of Linux laptop models, establishing itself as a go-to utility for out-of-the-box power savings, contrasting with more manual or interactive tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>path...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more paths to files or directories to format. If no paths are specified, the current directory is assumed.<br><br><b><b>-check</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Check if the input files are already formatted. Returns exit status 0 if all files are formatted, 1 otherwise. Does not write changes.<br><br><b><b>-diff</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display diffs of what would be changed by the formatting. Does not write changes.<br><br><b><b>-write=false</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not write changes to disk. This option is implied by <b>-check</b> and <b>-diff</b>.<br><br><b><b>-list=false</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not list files whose formatting would change. This option is implied by <b>-diff</b>.<br><br><b><b>-recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recurse into subdirectories when formatting. This is useful for formatting an entire project.<br><br><b><b>-no-color</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable color in the output, particularly useful when piping output to other commands or files.<br><br><b><b>-compact=false</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not compact the output. By default, <b>tofu fmt</b> compacts output where appropriate, such as within lists.<br><br><b><b>-width=</b><i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the column limit for formatting. Arguments will wrap if they exceed this width.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tofu fmt</b> command is a specialized utility within the OpenTofu ecosystem designed to automatically rewrite OpenTofu configuration files to a canonical format. It standardizes indentation, spacing, and ordering of elements within HCL (HashiCorp Configuration Language) and JSON configuration files. By ensuring a consistent code style, <b>tofu fmt</b> significantly improves the readability of configuration files, simplifies code reviews, and reduces noise in version control diffs. It is an idempotent operation, meaning that running it multiple times on an already formatted file will not introduce further changes. This command can operate on specific files or entire directories, recursing through subdirectories if specified. It is commonly used in development workflows and CI/CD pipelines to enforce coding standards and maintain project consistency.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>tofu fmt</b> command modifies files in place by default, which can lead to data loss if not used carefully or without version control. While it aims for consistent formatting, it might reorder certain blocks or arguments in a way that, though functionally identical, might appear unexpected at first glance. It is primarily designed for HCL and JSON configuration files specifically used by OpenTofu and other HashiCorp tools, not general-purpose text files.


title: IDEMPOTENCY
content:
<b>tofu fmt</b> is an idempotent command. Running it multiple times on the same input files will produce the same formatted output, provided no manual changes have occurred between runs. This characteristic makes it safe and reliable for automated workflows.


title: EXIT CODES
content:
The command typically exits with 0 on success. If <b>-check</b> is used, it exits with 1 if any files are unformatted. Other non-zero exit codes may indicate errors during execution.


title: INTEGRATION WITH VERSION CONTROL
content:
It is common practice to integrate <b>tofu fmt</b> into pre-commit hooks or CI/CD pipelines to automatically format code before commits or deployments, ensuring that all code committed to a repository adheres to the defined style.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tofu fmt</b> command is a direct descendant of the <b>terraform fmt</b> command, which was originally introduced to standardize the formatting of Terraform configuration files. When OpenTofu forked from Terraform, it inherited much of its functionality, including the robust formatting engine. This command has been a staple in the Infrastructure as Code ecosystem, widely adopted for its ability to enforce consistency across large codebases, integrate seamlessly into CI/CD pipelines, and improve collaboration among developers by minimizing stylistic disagreements.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tox</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>posargs</i>]<br><b>tox</b> -e <i>ENVLIST</i> [<i>posargs</i>]<br><b>tox</b> --help<br><b>tox</b> --version


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-e <i>ENVLIST</i>, --envlist <i>ENVLIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run only specific test environments from the <i>tox.ini</i> file. You can specify multiple environments separated by commas, e.g., <i>py38,py39,lint</i>.<br><br><b>-r, --recreate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recreate the virtual environments even if they already exist. This is useful for ensuring a clean build and avoiding cached issues.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increase the verbosity of <b>tox</b>'s output. Can be specified multiple times (e.g., <i>-vvv</i>) for even more detailed logs.<br><br><b>-i <i>CMD</i>, --install-command <i>CMD</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Command to use for installing packages instead of the default. For example, <i>pip install {opts} {packages}</i>.<br><br><b>--skip-missing-interpreters</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not fail if an interpreter specified in <i>tox.ini</i> (e.g., <i>python3.10</i>) is not found on the system.<br><br><b>--parallel [<i>MODE</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run environments in parallel. <i>MODE</i> can be <i>auto</i>, <i>all</i>, <i>skip</i> (default), or a specific number of parallel processes.<br><br><b>-c <i>FILE</i>, --config <i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific <i>tox.ini</i> configuration file instead of searching for the default in the current directory or parent directories.<br><br><b>-w <i>DIR</i>, --workdir <i>DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the working directory for <b>tox</b> environments and their associated files.<br><br><b>--result-json <i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write a JSON report of the <b>tox</b> run results to the specified <i>FILE</i>, useful for programmatic analysis.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show <b>tox</b>'s help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show <b>tox</b>'s version and exit.<br><br><b><i>posargs</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Positional arguments passed directly to the test command defined in <i>tox.ini</i>. These arguments are typically separated from <b>tox</b> options by <i>--</i> (e.g., <i>tox -- pytest -k 'my_test'</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tox</b> is a command-line tool that automates and standardizes the testing of Python projects across various environments. It achieves this by creating isolated virtual environments for each specified test configuration (e.g., different Python versions, dependency sets). For each environment, <b>tox</b> installs the project and its dependencies, then runs the defined test commands. This ensures that a project's tests pass consistently across different Python interpreters and dependency combinations, preventing unexpected failures due to environment-specific issues. It relies on a <i>tox.ini</i> configuration file to define these environments and testing steps, making the testing process reproducible and easy to integrate into CI/CD pipelines. It's important to note that <b>tox</b> is not a native Linux system command, but a Python application typically installed via <b>pip</b>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>tox</b> requires Python and <b>pip</b> to be installed on the system to function. Its operation is entirely dependent on a valid <i>tox.ini</i> configuration file in the project's root directory. Virtual environments created by <b>tox</b> can consume significant disk space over time, especially when managing many Python versions and diverse dependencies. Internet access is often necessary for <b>tox</b> to download project dependencies during environment setup.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (TOX.INI)
content:
<b>tox</b> relies heavily on a <i>tox.ini</i> file, typically located in the project's root directory. This file defines the various test environments, their specific dependencies, the commands to execute within each environment, and other custom settings. It is the central hub for customizing <b>tox</b>'s behavior for a given project, making the test setup reproducible and shareable.


title: VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
content:
For each specified test environment, <b>tox</b> creates and manages a separate, isolated Python virtual environment. This crucial isolation ensures that dependencies for one test configuration do not conflict with another, providing a clean and reproducible testing sandpit for each run. <b>tox</b> handles the entire lifecycle of these environments, including creation, package installation, and execution of test commands.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>tox</b> was initially created by Holger Krekel (also known for <b>pytest</b>) to address the challenge of consistently testing Python packages against multiple Python versions and dependency combinations. Its development focused on standardizing the test execution process for Python projects, making it a critical tool for maintaining software quality and ensuring compatibility across different environments. It has since become an industry standard for Python project testing and CI/CD integration, widely adopted in open-source and commercial projects.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tr</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SET1</i> [<i>SET2</i>]<br><b>tr</b> -d [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SET1</i><br><b>tr</b> -s [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SET1</i><br><b>tr</b> -ds [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>SET1</i> [<i>SET2</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>SET1</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The set of characters to be translated, deleted, or squeezed. Can be literal characters, ranges (e.g., 'a-z'), octal values, or POSIX character classes.<br><br><b>SET2</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The set of characters to which characters from SET1 are translated. Required for translation operations. If shorter than SET1, the last character of SET2 is repeated (unless -t is used).<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--complement</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Complement SET1. This means characters <i>not</i> in SET1 are processed.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--delete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete characters in SET1 from the input. SET2 is ignored when this option is used alone.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--squeeze-repeats</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Replace each sequence of a repeated character that is in SET1 with a single occurrence of that character. If SET2 is also specified, characters are first translated, then squeezed.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--truncate-set1</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Truncate SET1 to the length of SET2 before translation. Useful when SET1 is longer than SET2 to prevent the last character of SET2 from being repeated.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tr</b> command, short for "translate or delete characters," is a powerful command-line utility in Unix-like operating systems used for character manipulation. It reads from standard input, performs operations on individual characters, and writes the result to standard output.<br><br>Its primary functions are to translate occurrences of characters from one set to another or to delete specific characters from the input stream. It's often used in conjunction with pipes to filter or transform text data. Common applications include converting case (e.g., uppercase to lowercase), removing unwanted characters, or squeezing multiple occurrences of a character into a single one. Unlike <b>sed</b> or <b>awk</b>, <b>tr</b> operates purely on characters, not lines or fields, making it highly efficient for character-level transformations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>tr</b> processes input character by character, not line by line. It does not understand line breaks or patterns in the same way <b>sed</b> or <b>awk</b> do.</li><li>If SET2 is shorter than SET1 (and <b>-t</b> is not used), the last character of SET2 is reused for the remaining characters in SET1. If SET2 is longer, the extra characters in SET2 are ignored.</li><li>Locale settings can influence how character ranges (e.g., 'a-z') are interpreted. For consistent behavior, it's often recommended to set <i>LC_ALL=C</i>.</li></ul>


title: CHARACTER SETS AND RANGES
content:
<b>tr</b> interprets <i>SET1</i> and <i>SET2</i> as character sets, which can be defined in several ways:<br><ul><li><i>Literal characters:</i> E.g., 'abc'.</li><li><i>Ranges:</i> E.g., 'a-z' (all lowercase letters from 'a' to 'z'), '0-9' (all digits).</li><li><i>Octal values:</i> E.g., '\101' for character 'A'.</li><li><i>Special escape sequences:</i> '\n' (newline), '\t' (tab), '\\' (backslash), etc.</li><li><i>POSIX character classes:</i> These must be enclosed in <i>[::]</i>, e.g., '[:lower:]'. Common classes include:<br><i><b>[:alnum:]</b></i> (alphanumeric characters)<br><i><b>[:alpha:]</b></i> (alphabetic characters)<br><i><b>[:blank:]</b></i> (space and tab characters)<br><i><b>[:cntrl:]</b></i> (control characters)<br><i><b>[:digit:]</b></i> (decimal digits)<br><i><b>[:graph:]</b></i> (printable characters excluding space)<br><i><b>[:lower:]</b></i> (lowercase letters)<br><i><b>[:print:]</b></i> (printable characters including space)<br><i><b>[:punct:]</b></i> (punctuation characters)<br><i><b>[:space:]</b></i> (all whitespace characters)<br><i><b>[:upper:]</b></i> (uppercase letters)<br><i><b>[:xdigit:]</b></i> (hexadecimal digits)</li></ul>


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<ul><li><i>Case Conversion:</i> Convert input from lowercase to uppercase or vice versa. <br><i>Example:</i> <code>echo "Hello World" | tr '[:lower:]' '[:upper:]'</code> -> HELLO WORLD</li><li><i>Removing Characters:</i> Delete specific unwanted characters from the input stream.<br><i>Example:</i> <code>echo "a-b-c" | tr -d '-'</code> -> abc</li><li><i>Squeezing Repeats:</i> Replace sequences of repeated characters with a single instance.<br><i>Example:</i> <code>echo "Heeellooo" | tr -s 'eo'</code> -> Helo</li><li><i>Replacing Newlines:</i> Convert multi-line input into a single line or vice versa.<br><i>Example:</i> <code>cat file.txt | tr '\n' ' '</code> (replaces newlines with spaces)</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tr</b> command has been a standard Unix utility since the earliest versions of Unix. It was part of the original AT&T Unix system, making it one of the oldest and most fundamental command-line tools. Its design reflects the Unix philosophy of small, specialized tools that do one thing well and can be combined using pipes. The core functionality has remained largely consistent over decades, with minor enhancements and standardization efforts (like POSIX).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-p port</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the destination port number to use for the probes. Defaults to a high, unused UDP port.<br><br><b>-m max_hops</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum number of hops (TTL) to probe. Defaults to 30.<br><br><b>-l pktlen</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the initial size of the probing packet in bytes. <code>tracepath</code> will increase this size to discover MTU.<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not resolve hostnames for IP addresses, displaying only numeric IP addresses. This can speed up execution.<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints both the numeric IP addresses and their resolved hostnames for each hop.<br><br><b>-e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows ICMP extensions, as defined by RFC4884, if present in the ICMP errors received.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information for the <code>tracepath</code> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>tracepath</code> is a powerful Linux command-line utility used to trace the network path from the local host to a specified destination, similar to <code>traceroute</code>. Its primary strength lies in its ability to discover the <i>Path Maximum Transmission Unit (PMTU)</i> along the route. Unlike traditional <code>traceroute</code> which often requires root privileges (though modern versions can use unprivileged methods), <code>tracepath</code> typically does not, as it relies on unprivileged UDP sockets for its probes. <br><br>The command sends UDP packets of increasing size to the destination and listens for ICMP "Packet Too Big" messages, which indicate when a router along the path needs to fragment the packet because it exceeds the MTU of an outgoing interface. By analyzing these messages, <code>tracepath</code> can accurately determine the smallest MTU on the entire path, which is crucial for efficient network communication and avoiding fragmentation. It reports each hop, the round-trip time, and the discovered MTU at various stages, providing valuable insights for troubleshooting connectivity and performance issues, especially those related to large packet transfers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<code>tracepath</code> relies on ICMP "Packet Too Big" messages (Type 3, Code 4) for its MTU discovery functionality. If firewalls or network devices along the path are configured to block or filter these ICMP messages, the MTU discovery may fail or report an inaccurate PMTU. <br><br>Similarly, if UDP probes on the chosen port are filtered by firewalls, the command may fail to reach the destination or report "no reply" for certain hops. <br><br>It primarily uses UDP probes and does not offer the same level of protocol control (e.g., TCP or ICMP echo probes) as some <code>traceroute</code> implementations.


title: HOW IT DIFFERS FROM TRACEROUTE
content:
While both commands trace network paths, <code>tracepath</code>'s core focus is on <i>Path MTU Discovery</i>. It actively tries to determine the largest packet size that can traverse the entire path without fragmentation by sending packets of increasing size and analyzing ICMP "Packet Too Big" messages. <code>traceroute</code>, by default, primarily focuses on mapping the hops and measuring latency, often using fixed-size packets. <code>tracepath</code> also generally does not require root privileges, unlike older <code>traceroute</code> versions that used raw sockets.


title: PATH MTU DISCOVERY (PMTUD)
content:
<code>tracepath</code> is an excellent tool for debugging PMTUD issues. PMTUD is a mechanism by which a sending host determines the largest MTU that can be used on the entire path to a destination without fragmentation. If PMTUD is failing (e.g., due to ICMP filtering), applications might experience slow performance or connection timeouts when trying to send large packets. <code>tracepath</code> helps diagnose where such MTU black holes might exist.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>tracepath</code> is part of the <code>iputils</code> package, a collection of network utilities for Linux. It was primarily developed by Alexey Kuznetsov, a key figure in the Linux kernel's networking subsystem and the author of <code>iproute2</code>. Its development aimed to provide a more effective and unprivileged tool for Path MTU Discovery (PMTUD) compared to traditional <code>traceroute</code> tools, which often required elevated permissions or were less focused on MTU. It was designed to work seamlessly with modern Linux networking stacks and their PMTUD mechanisms.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>transcode</b> [<i>general_options</i>] <b>-i</b> <i>input_file</i> [<i>input_options</i>] <b>-o</b> <i>output_file</i> [<i>output_options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b> <i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input multimedia file or device (e.g., DVD).<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output multimedia file.<br><br><b><b>-V</b> <i><module></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the video encoder module (e.g., <i>mpeg2</i>, <i>xvid</i>, <i>h264</i>).<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i><module></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the audio encoder module (e.g., <i>mp3</i>, <i>ac3</i>, <i>aac</i>).<br><br><b><b>-m</b> <i><module></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the muxer module for the output container format (e.g., <i>mpeg</i>, <i>avi</i>, <i>mp4</i>).<br><br><b><b>-N</b> <i><aspect_ratio></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output video aspect ratio (e.g., <i>4:3</i>, <i>16:9</i>).<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i><rate></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output video framerate (frames per second).<br><br><b><b>-j</b> <i><crop_geometry></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Crops the video frame. Geometry typically in <i>left:right:top:bottom</i> pixel offsets.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i><scale_geometry></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scales the video frame to a specified resolution (e.g., <i>720x480</i>).<br><br><b><b>-y</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrites existing output files without prompting for confirmation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>transcode</b> is a comprehensive, command-line multimedia processing tool, part of the <i>transcode-tools</i> suite. It enables conversion between various audio and video formats, DVD ripping, and stream manipulation. Unlike monolithic tools, <b>transcode</b> operates using a modular architecture, employing separate modules for input (demuxer), video processing (encoders, filters), audio processing, and output (muxer).<br><br>This design provides extensive control over every aspect of the transcoding process, from codec selection and bitrates to complex video filters like cropping, scaling, and deinterlacing. While powerful, its syntax can be intricate, often requiring detailed knowledge of media formats and command-line options. It was historically a prominent tool for DVD backup and media conversion on Linux, though newer tools like FFmpeg have become more prevalent due to their broader format support and often simpler syntax for common tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>transcode</b> has a notoriously steep learning curve due to its extensive options and modular structure. It can be less actively maintained than modern tools like FFmpeg, potentially leading to compatibility issues with very new codecs or formats. Installation with all desired module support can sometimes be challenging due to various dependencies.


title: MODULAR ARCHITECTURE EXPLAINED
content:
The core strength and complexity of <b>transcode</b> lie in its modular design. It uses separate dynamically loaded modules for:<br><ul><li><i>Input (Demuxers)</i>: Handle reading various container formats and extracting streams.</li><li><i>Video Filters/Encoders</i>: Perform video processing (scaling, cropping, deinterlacing) and encoding into target video codecs.</li><li><i>Audio Filters/Encoders</i>: Process and encode audio streams.</li><li><i>Output (Muxers)</i>: Combine the processed video and audio streams into the desired output container format.</li></ul>This modularity offers unparalleled control but requires the user to explicitly define the entire processing chain for complex tasks.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>transcode</b> emerged as part of the <i>transcode-tools</i> project, gaining popularity in the early to mid-2000s primarily for DVD ripping and general multimedia conversion on Linux. It predates the widespread dominance of FFmpeg for general-purpose transcoding, offering a highly customizable alternative. Its modular design was a key feature, allowing users to swap out different demuxers, encoders, and muxers, providing fine-grained control over the transcoding pipeline. While still functional, its usage has waned in favor of more user-friendly and frequently updated tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>host</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The destination hostname or IP address to measure reachability or round-trip time to.<br><br><b>-c <i>count</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of echo requests (trips) to send. (<i>Highly inferred</i>)<br><br><b>-t <i>timeout</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds for each trip. (<i>Highly inferred</i>)<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables quiet mode, printing only the summary results. (<i>Highly inferred</i>)<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose mode, providing more detailed output. (<i>Highly inferred</i>)<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>trip</b> command is an extremely rare and largely non-standard Linux utility, believed to have been a very simple network diagnostic tool. Its primary function was likely to measure the round-trip time to a specified host, conceptually similar to a highly simplified <b>ping</b> command, or to perform a basic hop-by-hop trace without the detailed reporting of <b>traceroute</b>.<br><br>Due to its limited functionality and profound lack of widespread adoption, <b>trip</b> is not commonly found in modern Linux distributions or their official documentation. It may have been part of specific, older <i>iputils</i> packages, custom builds, or highly niche embedded systems. Users overwhelmingly rely on standard, well-documented tools like <b>ping</b> for network reachability and round-trip time, and <b>traceroute</b> or <b>mtr</b> for path analysis, as <b>trip</b> offers no advantages over them and lacks any form of support or common presence.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>trip</b> command is not a standard utility found in most modern Linux distributions. Information regarding its exact syntax, options, and historical development is extremely scarce and largely undocumented. The parameters listed above are highly inferred based on common functionalities of simple network tools and should not be relied upon without verifying the specific version of <b>trip</b> being used (if it exists). If encountered, it is likely part of a custom build, an embedded system, or a very old and unmaintained software package. Users should always rely on standard tools like <b>ping</b>, <b>traceroute</b>, or <b>mtr</b> for network diagnostics, as <b>trip</b> lacks documentation, support, and widespread functionality.


title: <B>AVAILABILITY</B>
content:
The <b>trip</b> command is generally not included in standard <i>iputils</i> packages or typical installations of most modern Linux distributions (e.g., Debian, Ubuntu, Fedora, CentOS, RHEL). Attempting to execute <b>trip</b> on a default system will almost certainly result in a 'command not found' error.


title: <B>PURPOSE AND STANDARD ALTERNATIVES</B>
content:
While its precise original intent is unclear due to lack of documentation, <b>trip</b> likely aimed to provide basic network reachability or round-trip time measurement. For these purposes, <b>ping</b> is the universally accepted, far more feature-rich, and standardized tool. For detailed network path tracing and diagnostics, <b>traceroute</b> or <b>mtr</b> are the standard utilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
The exact history of the <b>trip</b> command is largely undocumented and obscure. It is believed to have been a minor utility, possibly part of very early versions or specific forks of the <i>iputils</i> package, intended for basic network reachability testing or simplified path tracing. Due to its limited feature set and the prevalence of more robust and standardized tools like <b>ping</b> and <b>traceroute</b>, <b>trip</b> never gained widespread adoption and has since fallen out of common use, if it was ever widely distributed as a standalone, mainstream command.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes a new Truffle project structure in the current directory.<br><br><b>compile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compiles all Solidity and Vyper contracts within the project.<br><br><b>migrate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deploys compiled contracts to the specified blockchain network. Supports incremental deployments.<br><br><b>test</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes JavaScript and Solidity tests against compiled contracts.<br><br><b>console</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts an interactive JavaScript console connected to a Truffle environment.<br><br><b>develop</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Spins up a local development blockchain client (like Ganache) for testing and development.<br><br><b>debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a powerful debugger for analyzing transactions on the blockchain.<br><br><b>create</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates new contract, migration, or test files with boilerplate code.<br><br><b>exec</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a specified JavaScript file within the Truffle environment.<br><br><b>dashboard</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the Truffle Dashboard, a browser-based application for secure transaction signing.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Truffle is a renowned development environment, testing framework, and asset pipeline for blockchains using the Ethereum Virtual Machine (EVM). It streamlines the decentralized application (DApp) development process by providing a comprehensive suite of tools. Developers use Truffle to write, compile, deploy, and debug smart contracts written in languages like Solidity or Vyper. It also includes features for interacting with deployed contracts from a client-side environment. Truffle integrates with various blockchain networks, allowing seamless development from local testing environments to public testnets and mainnets. Its robust testing framework ensures contract reliability, while its migration system simplifies deployment procedures, making it an indispensable tool for blockchain developers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Truffle is primarily designed for Ethereum Virtual Machine (EVM) compatible blockchains. It requires Node.js and a package manager like npm or yarn to be installed on the system. It's not a generic Linux utility but a specialized development tool for blockchain applications.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
Truffle projects are configured via a <i>truffle-config.js</i> file (or <i>truffle.js</i>), which allows developers to define network connections, compiler settings, and other project-specific parameters. This file is crucial for customizing the build and deployment process.


title: NETWORK MANAGEMENT
content:
Truffle supports seamless switching between various blockchain networks, including local development networks (like Ganache or Truffle Develop), public testnets (e.g., Sepolia, Goerli), and the Ethereum mainnet. Network configurations are defined in the project's configuration file, facilitating easy deployment to different environments.


title: HISTORY
content:
Truffle was created by ConsenSys in 2015 and has since become one of the foundational tools in the Ethereum development ecosystem. It played a crucial role in enabling early decentralized application (DApp) development and has continuously evolved, adapting to new blockchain technologies and developer needs. Its development has focused on providing a comprehensive, integrated environment for smart contract and DApp lifecycle management, from coding and testing to deployment.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>trufflehog</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> <i>[options]</i> <i>&lt;arguments&gt;</i><br>The primary command is <b>scan</b>, used as:<br><b>trufflehog scan</b> <i>&lt;target_type&gt;</i> <i>[scan_options]</i> <i>&lt;target_identifier&gt;</i><br>Examples:<br><i><b>trufflehog scan git --repo https://github.com/owner/repo.git --full-history --json</b></i><br><i><b>trufflehog scan filesystem --path /var/www/my-app --max-depth 3</b></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs findings in a structured JSON format, useful for programmatic processing and integration with other tools.<br><br><b>--no-verify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables SSL certificate verification for network requests, useful in certain environments but potentially insecure.<br><br><b>--entropy</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables the high-entropy secret detection engine. By default, both entropy and regex are enabled.<br><br><b>--regex</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables the regular expression-based secret detection engine. By default, both entropy and regex are enabled.<br><br><b>--allow-list <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a path to a YAML or JSON file containing a list of secrets or patterns to ignore, reducing false positives.<br><br><b>--output <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects scan results to the specified file instead of standard output (stdout).<br><br><b>--config <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads scan configurations from a specified YAML or JSON file, allowing for predefined scan settings.<br><br><b>--full-history</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For Git repository scans, processes the entire commit history, not just recent commits, ensuring comprehensive coverage.<br><br><b>--repo <url></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Used with <b>scan git</b>) Specifies the URL of the Git repository to scan.<br><br><b>--path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Used with <b>scan filesystem</b>) Specifies the local filesystem path to scan.<br><br><b>--log-level <level></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the logging verbosity level (e.g., debug, info, warn, error) for more detailed output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Trufflehog is an open-source secret scanning tool designed to find sensitive information such as API keys, passwords, and credentials across various data sources. It employs two primary detection methods:<br>1. <b>Entropy Checks</b>: It identifies strings with high entropy, which are often indicative of randomly generated secrets.<br>2. <b>Regular Expressions (Regex)</b>: It uses a comprehensive set of predefined regex patterns to match known secret formats (e.g., AWS access keys, private RSA keys, database connection strings).<br><br>Trufflehog can scan a wide range of targets, including Git repositories (local or remote, full history or specific commits), local file systems, Amazon S3 buckets, Docker images, and popular Git hosting platforms like GitHub, GitLab, and Bitbucket. Its versatile nature makes it an invaluable tool for security engineers, DevOps teams, and developers to proactively identify and mitigate secret exposures in codebases and infrastructure, helping to prevent data breaches and maintain a strong security posture. It is frequently integrated into CI/CD pipelines to ensure secrets are not accidentally committed.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Trufflehog can produce <b>false positives</b>, especially when using entropy detection on highly random but non-secret data. Running on very large Git repositories with extensive history can be <b>resource-intensive</b> and time-consuming. When scanning private repositories or cloud services, appropriate <b>authentication tokens or credentials</b> must be provided, which introduces its own security considerations. The effectiveness of regex-based detection depends on the comprehensiveness of its rule set, which may need customization for proprietary secret formats. It's crucial to review results manually or integrate with other security tools for verification.


title: SUBCOMMANDS
content:
Trufflehog organizes its functionality into subcommands. The most common is <b>scan</b>, used for initiating scans against various targets (e.g., <b>trufflehog scan git</b>, <b>trufflehog scan filesystem</b>, <b>trufflehog scan s3</b>, <b>trufflehog scan docker</b>). Other subcommands like <b>verify</b> (for validating findings against external services) or <b>configure</b> (for managing configurations) also exist, providing modularity to its operations.


title: HISTORY
content:
Trufflehog was originally created by Dylan Ayrey in 2015 as a Python-based tool focused on scanning Git repositories. Over the years, it evolved significantly. In 2021, the project was rewritten in Go by Truffle Security to improve performance, broaden its scanning capabilities to include various data sources beyond Git, and enhance its integration into modern DevSecOps workflows. This rewrite marked a major milestone, making Trufflehog a more robust and versatile secret scanning solution widely adopted in the cybersecurity community.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>truncate</b> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>FILE</i>...<br><b>truncate</b> <b>-s</b> <i>SIZE</i> [<i>OPTION</i>]... <i>FILE</i>...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-s</b>, <b>--size</b>=<i>SIZE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or adjust the file size to <i>SIZE</i> bytes.<br><i>SIZE</i> can be followed by units:<br><i>K, M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y</i> (powers of 1024, e.g., <i>10K</i> is 10 * 1024).<br><i>KB, MB, GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB, YB</i> (powers of 1000, e.g., <i>10KB</i> is 10 * 1000).<br><i>KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB, YiB</i> (explicitly binary powers of 1024, e.g., <i>10KiB</i> is 10 * 1024).<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--no-create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not create any files that do not exist. If a specified <i>FILE</i> does not exist, <b>truncate</b> will report an error and exit.<br><br><b><b>--reference</b>=<i>RFILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the size of the target <i>FILE</i> to that of <i>RFILE</i>. The size is determined by the size of <i>RFILE</i>.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--relative</b>[=<i>OP</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjust the size relative to the current file size. <i>OP</i> can be <i>+</i> (add), <i>-</i> (subtract), <i>&lt;</i> (truncate if larger), or <i>&gt;</i> (extend if smaller). If <i>OP</i> is omitted, it defaults to <i>+</i>. For example, <i><b>--relative</b>=+1G</i> adds 1 Gigabyte to the file's current size.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--io-blocks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interpret <i>SIZE</i> as the number of I/O blocks instead of bytes. This option is less commonly used as byte-based sizing is generally more precise and common.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>truncate</b> command-line utility is used to precisely control the size of a file. It can both shrink a file, discarding any data beyond the new specified length, or extend it, appending null bytes (zeros) or creating "holes" to reach the desired size.<br><br>This operation is highly efficient for large files as it modifies the file's metadata directly, avoiding the need to read or write the entire file content. It's commonly employed for managing log files, pre-allocating space for future data, or creating sparse files to optimize disk usage. It provides a convenient user-level interface to the underlying <i>ftruncate(2)</i> system call.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Truncating a file to a smaller size <i>irrevocably discards</i> any data beyond the new size. There is no undo for this operation.<br><br>Extending a file often results in <i>sparse files</i>. This means the newly allocated space might not consume actual disk blocks until data is explicitly written to them, saving disk space. However, some filesystems may allocate physical blocks immediately.<br><br>The user executing <b>truncate</b> must have write permissions on the target file(s) and potentially the directory if creating a new file.<br><br><b>truncate</b> does not operate on directories; it is designed solely for regular files.


title: SPARSE FILES
content:
One of the key uses of <b>truncate</b>, particularly when extending a file, is the creation of <i>sparse files</i>. When <b>truncate</b> extends a file, it typically creates 'holes' in the file rather than physically writing zero bytes to the new space. These holes do not consume actual disk blocks until data is explicitly written into them. This behavior is highly beneficial for large files that are expected to grow incrementally, as it conserves disk space.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>truncate</b> command is a utility provided by GNU Coreutils, acting as a user-friendly wrapper for the underlying <i>ftruncate(2)</i> system call. Its core functionality of resizing files has remained consistent since its inception. Over time, features like relative sizing (<i>--relative</i>) and reference file sizing (<i>--reference</i>) were added to enhance its flexibility and make it a more versatile tool for file system management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>trust</b> [<i>OPTIONS...</i>] <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>ARGUMENTS...</i>]<br><br>Examples:<br><b>trust</b> <b>list</b> --filter=<i>server-auth</i><br><b>trust</b> <b>anchor</b> --store <i>my-ca.pem</i><br><b>trust</b> <b>anchor</b> --remove <i>my-old-ca.pem</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--filter=TYPE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters the output of the <b>list</b> command to show only certificates with a specific trust purpose, such as <i>trust</i> (trusted roots), <i>blacklist</i>, <i>server-auth</i>, or <i>client-auth</i>.<br><br><b>--quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses informational messages and prints only errors, making the output less verbose.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, providing more detailed information about the operations being performed.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a summary of the command's usage and available options, then exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <b>trust</b> command and exits.<br><br><b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the trusted or blacklisted certificates, either all of them or filtered by purpose.<br><br><b>anchor <filename...></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages trust anchors. Used with <i>--store</i> to add a certificate file as a trusted anchor, or <i>--remove</i> to remove an existing one.<br><br><b>extract</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts trusted certificates into a format suitable for use by applications.<br><br><b>dump</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps all certificates and trust information from the system's trust store in a human-readable format.<br><br><b>extract-compat</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts certificates for compatibility with older applications that expect certificates in traditional formats or locations.<br><br><b>extract-pkcs11</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts information about available PKCS#11 modules registered with the system.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>trust</b> command is a powerful utility within Linux systems designed to manage the system-wide trust policy for X.509 certificates and PKCS#11 modules. It is an integral part of the <i>p11-kit</i> framework, which aims to provide a unified and standardized way for applications to access cryptographic objects and trust anchors. System administrators primarily use this command to add, remove, or list trusted root certificates, effectively controlling which Certificate Authorities (CAs) and cryptographic devices the system and its applications will implicitly trust. This centralization simplifies the management of cryptographic trust, ensuring consistency across various software components that rely on the system's trust store. Unlike older, disparate methods, <b>trust</b> provides a modern, robust, and programmatic interface for maintaining a secure and up-to-date certificate trust environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Most operations that modify the system's trust policy (e.g., adding or removing trust anchors) require <b>root</b> privileges or the use of <b>sudo</b>.<br>The <b>trust</b> command manages system-wide trust. Changes affect all applications that rely on the standard system trust store, not just individual user configurations.<br>Modifications made by <b>trust</b> typically trigger an update of the system's CA certificates bundle (e.g., via <i>update-ca-certificates</i>), which may require applications or services to be restarted to pick up the changes.<br>This command is specific to the <i>p11-kit</i> framework and environments that utilize it for certificate trust management.


title: TRUST STORE LOCATIONS
content:
The <b>trust</b> command primarily interacts with the system's consolidated trust store, which typically sources certificates from locations like <i>/etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/</i> (for locally added anchors), <i>/usr/share/pki/ca-trust-source/</i> (for distribution-provided anchors), and other designated directories. The processed and aggregated trust information is then made available to applications, often in formats like PEM bundles.


title: INTEGRATION WITH P11-KIT
content:
<b>trust</b> is a front-end utility for the <i>p11-kit</i> library and daemon. <i>p11-kit</i> itself provides a way for applications to discover and use PKCS#11 modules (like hardware security modules) and also manages a unified system-wide trust store. The <b>trust</b> command leverages this underlying framework to perform its operations, ensuring that certificate and module management is consistent and robust across the system.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>trust</b> command is a relatively modern addition to Linux's cryptographic infrastructure, emerging as part of the <i>p11-kit</i> project. Prior to its introduction, managing system-wide certificate trust often involved manual placement of certificate files and custom scripts or less standardized utilities. The development of <i>p11-kit</i> and subsequently the <b>trust</b> command aimed to centralize and standardize the management of PKCS#11 modules and X.509 certificate trust anchors, providing a consistent API for applications and a robust command-line interface for administrators. This evolution has significantly improved the security posture and manageability of certificate-based authentication and encryption on Linux systems.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>try-from</I> is <B>not</B> a recognized or standard command in typical Linux distributions. <br>There is no executable or manual page by this name in common system paths. <br>This term commonly appears in the context of programming languages, such as Rust's <I>TryFrom</I> trait, which handles fallible type conversions between types. <br>If you intended to use a specific Linux command, please verify the exact name or context. <br>It might also be part of a custom script, an internal function name, or a misunderstanding of a different command's syntax.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Users attempting to execute <I>try-from</I> on a standard Linux system will encounter a 'command not found' error. <br>Any online search for this term will likely point to programming language documentation or unrelated topics rather than a Linux command.


title: COMMON MISCONCEPTIONS
content:
The word <I>try</I> can be found in shell scripting contexts (e.g., using <I>&&</I> and <I>||</I> for conditional execution, or within more advanced shell frameworks that mimic <I>try-catch</I> blocks). <br>The word <I>from</I> is often associated with email headers, data sources, or specific parsing utilities. <br>However, <I>try-from</I> as a single, hyphenated, standalone command does not exist within standard Linux utilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
<B>N/A</B> - As <I>try-from</I> is not a standard Linux command, there is no official development or usage history associated with it in this context.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ts</b> [<i>-r</i>] [<i>-s</i>] [<i>-i</i>] [<i>-m</i>] [<i>-u</i>] [<i>-H</i>] [<i>-p</i>] [<i>-h</i>] [<i>-v</i>] [<i>format</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-r</b>, <b>--relative</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs timestamps relative to the first timestamp received. If input pauses, it outputs the time since the last timestamp.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--absolute</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs timestamps as seconds since the Unix epoch. This is the default behavior if no format options are specified.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--iso</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs timestamps in ISO 8601 format (e.g., YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS, with milliseconds implied).<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--milliseconds</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes milliseconds in the output timestamp. This option is implicitly enabled when using the <b>-i</b> (ISO) format.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--utc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) for timestamps instead of local time.<br><br><b><b>-H</b>, <b>--human</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs timestamps in a human-readable relative format, such as "1 hour ago" or "2 minutes ago".<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--pretty</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs timestamps in a pretty duration format, e.g., "1h 2m 3s".<br><br><b><b>format</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom output format using <i>strftime(3)</i> syntax. When this is used, other format options (<i>-r, -s, -i, -m, -u, -H, -p</i>) are ignored.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information for the <b>ts</b> command and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ts</b> command, part of the <i>moreutils</i> package, reads lines from standard input and prepends them with a timestamp before writing to standard output. It is a highly versatile tool for logging and debugging, allowing users to easily add time information to any stream of data. The timestamps can be configured in various formats, including seconds since epoch, ISO 8601, relative to the first input, or a human-readable duration.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>ts</b> command is not part of the standard core utilities on all Linux distributions; it is typically found in the <i>moreutils</i> package, which may need to be installed separately. It processes input line by line, so it's best suited for text streams rather than binary data. In <i>relative</i> mode (<b>-r</b>), if there's a significant pause in input, the time difference calculated will be from the last received line, not necessarily the overall start of the process.


title: COMMON USAGE PATTERNS
content:
<b>ts</b> is frequently piped with other commands to add timestamps to their output. For example:<br><br><i>tail -f /var/log/syslog | ts</i><br>Adds default timestamps to live syslog output.<br><br><i>ping -i 3 localhost | ts -r</i><br>Adds timestamps showing time elapsed between each ping reply.<br><br><i>echo "Hello World" | ts '%H:%M:%.S'</i><br>Adds a timestamp with hours, minutes, and seconds including milliseconds using a custom <i>strftime</i> format string.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ts</b> command is part of the <i>moreutils</i> collection, a set of small, useful Unix utilities that operate on common data streams. This collection was created by Joey Hess, a Debian developer, to provide tools that complement the standard Unix toolkit without being overly complex or having many dependencies. <b>ts</b> addresses a common need for timestamping output from other commands, especially in scripts and during debugging, becoming a de facto standard for this specific task within the Unix-like ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b><code>ts-node [options] [file or script] [arguments...]</code></b><br><b><code>ts-node -e "code"</code></b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b><code>-P, --project &lt;path&gt;</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the path to the <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b> file. By default, <i>ts-node</i> searches for <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b> in the current working directory.<br><br><b><b><code>-T, --transpile-only</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable type checking during compilation. This can significantly speed up execution for large projects but means type errors will not be reported by <i>ts-node</i>.<br><br><b><b><code>-r, --require &lt;module&gt;</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Require a module or file before executing the main script, similar to Node.js's <b><code>--require</code></b> flag. Useful for polyfills or global setup.<br><br><b><b><code>-e, --eval &lt;code&gt;</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Evaluate the provided TypeScript code directly as a string.<br><br><b><b><code>--cwd &lt;path&gt;</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the current working directory for <i>ts-node</i>, affecting module resolution and <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b> discovery.<br><br><b><b><code>--files</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load all files included in the <b><code>files</code></b> array of your <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b>, which are usually ignored by default for performance reasons.<br><br><b><b><code>--esm</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable experimental ES Modules support for Node.js and TypeScript. This uses Node.js's native ESM loader.<br><br><b><b><code>--compiler &lt;name&gt;</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a custom TypeScript compiler module to use instead of the default <b><code>typescript</code></b> package.<br><br><b><b><code>--pretty</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use color and style for diagnostic messages and errors, improving readability.<br><br><b><b><code>--skip-project</code></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Completely skip <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b> discovery and usage. <i>ts-node</i> will fall back to default compiler options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ts-node</i> is a TypeScript execution environment for Node.js, enabling developers to run TypeScript files directly without prior compilation to JavaScript. This significantly accelerates the development workflow, particularly for scripting, testing, and development server execution. It seamlessly integrates with Node.js's module resolution system, allowing the use of <b><code>require()</code></b> and <b><code>import</code></b> statements. By performing on-the-fly transpilation, <i>ts-node</i> eliminates the need for a separate build step during development, providing a rapid feedback loop. It supports a wide array of TypeScript features and Node.js versions, making it an indispensable tool for modern TypeScript projects.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Performance Overhead</b>: While convenient for development, <i>ts-node</i> introduces a compilation overhead. For production deployments, it's generally recommended to pre-compile TypeScript code to JavaScript using <b><code>tsc</code></b> for optimal performance.<br><b>Type Checking vs. Speed</b>: By default, <i>ts-node</i> performs type checking, which can be slow for very large projects. The <b><code>--transpile-only</code></b> flag can mitigate this by skipping type checks, but you lose immediate type error feedback during runtime.<br><b>Module Resolution with Paths</b>: Configuring module resolution, especially with <b><code>paths</code></b> mapping in <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b>, can sometimes require additional setup (e.g., using <b><code>tsconfig-paths</code></b> alongside <i>ts-node</i>) to work correctly.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>ts-node</i> automatically loads and respects the compiler options defined in a <b><code>tsconfig.json</code></b> file found in the current directory or specified via the <b><code>--project</code></b> flag. This includes settings like <b><code>target</code></b>, <b><code>module</code></b>, <b><code>strict</code></b>, and others, which directly influence how <i>ts-node</i> transpiles your code.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
Many <i>ts-node</i> options can also be configured via environment variables, prefixed with <b><code>TS_NODE_</code></b> (e.g., <b><code>TS_NODE_PROJECT</code></b>, <b><code>TS_NODE_TRANSPILE_ONLY</code></b>, <b><code>TS_NODE_COMPILER_OPTIONS</code></b>). This provides flexibility for CI/CD pipelines, Docker environments, or specific script configurations without modifying command-line arguments.


title: HISTORY
content:
Before <i>ts-node</i>, developers often had to compile their TypeScript code to JavaScript with <b><code>tsc</code></b> after every change to run it, leading to a cumbersome and slow development cycle. <i>ts-node</i> was created to streamline this process by providing an on-the-fly transpilation layer, allowing TypeScript files to be executed directly, much like how Node.js executes JavaScript or Babel-node handles modern JavaScript features. It quickly became a de facto standard tool for rapid TypeScript development, testing, and scripting, significantly improving developer productivity and feedback loops.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b>, <b>--absolute</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output absolute timestamps, typically in a format similar to <i>date(1)</i>'s default output (e.g., 'Mon Jan 1 00:00:00 2023'). By default, <i>ts</i> outputs time elapsed since its invocation, not wall-clock time.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--iso8601</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output absolute timestamps in the ISO 8601 format (e.g., '2023-01-01T00:00:00.000000+0000'). This is often preferred for machine parsing and consistency.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--relative</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output relative timestamps, showing the time elapsed since the <i>previous</i> line was processed. This helps in understanding the duration between individual events.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--squash</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Squash consecutive blank lines into a single blank line. Useful for cleaning up output from verbose commands.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--milliseconds</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include milliseconds in the timestamps. This provides finer granularity for timing events. This is the default for relative timestamps.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--utc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When using absolute timestamps (with <b>-a</b> or <b>-i</b>), use Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) instead of local time.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a brief help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ts</i>, part of the <b>moreutils</b> package, is a simple yet powerful command-line utility designed to prepend timestamps to each line read from standard input. It is particularly useful for monitoring long-running processes, debugging scripts, or creating log files where precise timing of events is crucial.<br><br>By default, <i>ts</i> adds a timestamp representing the elapsed time since the <i>ts</i> command itself started. This allows users to easily see how much time has passed between events in a stream of output. It can also be configured to output absolute wall-clock times in various formats, including ISO 8601, or to show relative time differences between consecutive lines.<br><br>The command functions as a filter: it reads input line by line, adds the chosen timestamp, and then prints the modified line to standard output. This makes it highly composable with other Unix commands via pipes, enabling flexible logging and analysis workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <i>ts</i> is part of the <b>moreutils</b> package. It should not be confused with other commands that might share the name 'ts' on some systems, such as <i>task spooler</i>. The exact behavior and available options might vary slightly depending on the specific version of <b>moreutils</b> installed.<br><br>While highly effective for general logging, <i>ts</i> introduces a slight processing overhead, which might be a consideration for extremely high-throughput data streams.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ts</i> is a utility included in the <b>moreutils</b> package, a collection of supplemental Unix tools that aim to fill gaps between standard core utilities and common user needs. It was authored by Joey Hess and is designed to be simple, efficient, and composable within the Unix philosophy of small, specialized tools that do one thing well. Its development focuses on providing commonly needed functionality in a lightweight manner.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a <i>tsconfig.json</i> file in the current directory with default options.<br><br><b>--watch, -w</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Watches for file changes and recompiles automatically.<br><br><b>--project <path>, -p <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compiles the project in the specified path, or the current directory if no path is provided.<br><br><b>--target <version>, -t <version></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the ECMAScript target version for the output JavaScript (e.g., <i>ES5</i>, <i>ES2015</i>, <i>ESNext</i>).<br><br><b>--module <kind>, -m <kind></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the module code generation method (e.g., <i>CommonJS</i>, <i>ESNext</i>, <i>AMD</i>).<br><br><b>--outDir <dir></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects output structure to the specified directory.<br><br><b>--outFile <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Concatenates and emits output into a single file.<br><br><b>--rootDir <dir></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the root directory of input files.<br><br><b>--strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables all strict type-checking options (e.g., <i>noImplicitAny</i>, <i>strictNullChecks</i>).<br><br><b>--noEmit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not emit outputs, only perform type checking.<br><br><b>--jsx <mode></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the JSX emit mode (e.g., <i>preserve</i>, <i>react</i>, <i>react-jsx</i>).<br><br><b>--listFiles</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints names of files that are part of the compilation.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the compiler version.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints a detailed help message with all available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tsc</b> is the TypeScript Compiler, a command-line utility that transforms TypeScript files (<i>.ts</i>, <i>.tsx</i>, <i>.d.ts</i>) into standard JavaScript files (<i>.js</i>). Developed by Microsoft, TypeScript is a superset of JavaScript, adding optional static typing and class-based object-oriented programming features. The primary purpose of <b>tsc</b> is to perform type-checking on TypeScript code, identify potential errors during development, and then emit runnable JavaScript code that can be executed in any JavaScript runtime environment (like browsers or Node.js).<br><br>The compiler leverages a configuration file, <i>tsconfig.json</i>, which dictates how the compilation process should behave, including target JavaScript version, module resolution strategy, output directories, and more. While <b>tsc</b> can compile individual files, it is most commonly used in projects by running <b>tsc</b> in the project root, allowing it to pick up the <i>tsconfig.json</i> file and compile the entire project. It also supports watch mode, automatically recompiling files upon changes, which is invaluable for rapid development cycles.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>tsc</b> is not a native Linux command; it is part of the Node.js ecosystem and requires <b>Node.js</b> and <b>npm</b> (or <b>yarn</b>) to be installed first. It is typically installed globally via npm (<i>npm install -g typescript</i>). While powerful, performance can be a concern for very large projects without proper configuration, requiring optimization of compiler options or build tooling. Its behavior is heavily dependent on the <i>tsconfig.json</i> file, which must be correctly configured for project-wide compilation.


title: ROLE OF <B>TSCONFIG.JSON</B>
content:
The <i>tsconfig.json</i> file is central to <b>tsc</b>'s operation for projects. It's a JSON file that specifies root files and compiler options required to compile the project. When <b>tsc</b> is run without specifying input files, it looks for this file in the current directory and parent directories to determine compilation settings and files to include. This allows for consistent build configurations across different environments and team members.


title: INTEGRATION WITH BUILD TOOLS
content:
While <b>tsc</b> handles compilation, it's often integrated into larger build workflows using tools like <b>Webpack</b>, <b>Rollup</b>, or <b>Parcel</b>. These tools can leverage <b>tsc</b> for type-checking and transpilation but also handle asset bundling, code splitting, and other complex build tasks, offering a more comprehensive solution for modern web applications.


title: HISTORY
content:
TypeScript was first publicly released by Microsoft in October 2012. <b>tsc</b> has been the core compilation tool since its inception, evolving alongside the TypeScript language itself. Early versions focused on providing robust static typing and ES6 features before they were widely adopted in JavaScript. Continuous development has added support for newer ECMAScript standards, improved performance, enhanced tooling integration, and refined its type system, making TypeScript a popular choice for large-scale application development.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>node(1)</b>: Node.js runtime environment., <b>npm(1)</b>: Node package manager., <b>yarn(1)</b>: A fast, reliable, and secure dependency management tool (alternative to npm).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output the shell commands to set and export the TERM environment variable. This is commonly used with <B>eval</B> to update the current shell's environment.<br><br><b>-Q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress printing of "Erase is <I>char</I>" and "Kill is <I>char</I>" messages to standard error.<br><br><b>-I</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all output, including terminal initialization strings and environment variable settings. Only actions like setting erase/kill characters are performed.<br><br><b>-m <I>mapping</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a terminal type mapping. This allows <B>tset</B> to select a terminal type based on a pattern matching the port type (e.g., <I>dialup:vt100</I> or <I>?:ansi</I>).<br><br><b>-d <I>type</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a default terminal type to use if <B>tset</B> cannot determine the terminal type automatically based on the environment or port settings.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Query the terminal type and print it to standard output. No terminal initialization is performed, and no environment variables are set.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Check the <I>terminfo</I> (or <I>termcap</I>) database for the number of columns and update the terminal settings if necessary, especially useful for window resizing.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Report the determined terminal type to standard error before performing any initialization. Useful for debugging.<br><br><b>-e [<I>char</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the erase character. If <I>char</I> is omitted, it defaults to Backspace. Use special notation for control characters (e.g., <I>^H</I> for Backspace).<br><br><b>-k [<I>char</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the kill character. If <I>char</I> is omitted, it defaults to Ctrl-U. Similar to <B>-e</B>, special notation can be used.<br><br><b>-i [<I>char</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the interrupt character. If <I>char</I> is omitted, it defaults to Ctrl-C. Similar to <B>-e</B>, special notation can be used.<br><br><b><I>terminal_type</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A specific terminal type to explicitly set. If provided, <B>tset</B> will use this type instead of attempting to determine it automatically.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tset</b> command is used to initialize the terminal, often during login, to ensure applications display correctly. It determines the terminal type and sets various terminal characteristics, such as the erase, kill, and interrupt characters, as well as the window size. It relies on the <I>terminfo</I> (or <I>termcap</I>) database to retrieve the necessary terminal capabilities. While still functional, <b>tset</b> has largely been superseded by the more modern and flexible <b>tput init</b> command for setting up terminal modes and capabilities. Despite this, it remains a common sight in older shell initialization scripts, like <I>.profile</I> or <I>.login</I>, where it helps adapt the terminal to the specific display environment, handling cases like dialing up from a different terminal type.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>tset</b> command is part of the <I>ncurses</I> library, which primarily uses the <I>terminfo</I> database but provides <I>termcap</I> compatibility. It is largely considered a legacy command, with its functionality mostly absorbed and improved upon by the <b>tput</b> utility, specifically <B>tput init</B> and <B>tput reset</B>. New shell scripts should generally prefer <b>tput</b> for terminal initialization.


title: COMMON USAGE WITH <B>EVAL</B>
content:
A common idiom for <b>tset</b> is to use it with <b>eval</b> to set the TERM environment variable correctly. For example, <B>eval `tset -s vt100`</B> would output commands like <B>TERM=vt100;</B> and <B>export TERM;</B>, which <B>eval</B> then executes in the current shell.<br><br>While <b>tset</b> can automatically determine the terminal type based on port settings or environment variables (like <B>TERM</B> or <B>TERMCAP</B>), explicitly providing a <I>terminal_type</I> or using the <B>-d</B> option provides robustness in environments where auto-detection might fail.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>tset</b> utility originated in the early days of Unix, designed to initialize character-mode terminals based on the <I>termcap</I> database. Its primary role was to set up the correct terminal type and characteristics for various display devices connected to a system. As the <I>terminfo</I> database superseded <I>termcap</I>, <b>tset</b> evolved to work with <I>terminfo</I> (often through compatibility layers). Over time, much of <b>tset</b>'s functionality, particularly regarding terminal initialization strings, was integrated into the more versatile <b>tput</b> command, making <b>tset</b> less critical for modern shell environments, though it remains available for backward compatibility and in older scripts.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tsget</b> [<b>-hVqv</b>] [<b>-P</b> <i>port</i>] [<b>-u</b> <i>username</i>] [<b>-p</b> <i>password</i>] [<b>-s</b> <i>serverid</i>] [<b>-i</b> <i>virtualserverid</i>] [<b>-c</b> <i>command</i>] [<i>host</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the program's version number and exits.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>port</i>, <b>--port=</b><i>port</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the TeamSpeak 3 server query port. The default port is <i>10011</i>.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>username</i>, <b>--username=</b><i>username</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the username for the server query login. The default username is <i>serveradmin</i>.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>password</i>, <b>--password=</b><i>password</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the password for the server query login.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>serverid</i>, <b>--serverid=</b><i>serverid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the ID of the physical server to interact with, relevant for host-level queries.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>virtualserverid</i>, <b>--vserverid=</b><i>virtualserverid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Indicates the ID of the virtual server to interact with. This is often required for virtual server-specific commands like <i>clientlist</i> or <i>serverinfo</i>.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>command</i>, <b>--command=</b><i>command</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The actual TeamSpeak 3 server query command to execute (e.g., <i>serverinfo</i>, <i>clientlist</i>, <i>channellist</i>).<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses verbose output, showing only the final result of the query.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, displaying more details about the query process.<br><br><b><i>host</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname or IP address of the TeamSpeak 3 server to connect to. If omitted, <i>localhost</i> is often assumed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tsget</i> is a command-line utility designed to interact with a TeamSpeak 3 server's query interface.<br>It provides a programmatic way to retrieve various pieces of information, such as server status, online client lists, channel details, and more, by sending specific query commands to the server's query port (default <i>10011</i>).<br>This tool is invaluable for server administrators who need to monitor their TeamSpeak servers, automate tasks, or integrate server data into external applications or dashboards.<br>Essentially, <i>tsget</i> acts as a convenient client for the TeamSpeak 3 ServerQuery protocol, abstracting away the complexities of establishing a raw TCP connection and manually sending commands, allowing users to focus on the data they wish to retrieve from the server.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>tsget</i> relies on the TeamSpeak 3 server's query interface being enabled and accessible on the specified port. Firewall rules may block connections. Incorrect query credentials (username/password) or virtual server IDs will result in authentication or permission errors. The output format for different query commands (via <b>-c</b>) can vary significantly and may require further parsing.


title: COMMON QUERY COMMANDS
content:
The <b>-c</b> option is used to send specific commands to the TeamSpeak server. Some common examples include:<br><b>serverinfo</b>: Retrieves general information about the current virtual server.<br><b>clientlist</b>: Lists all connected clients.<br><b>channellist</b>: Lists all channels on the server.<br><b>version</b>: Gets the TeamSpeak server version information.<br><b>hostinfo</b>: Provides information about the physical host server instance.<br>The full list of available commands depends on the TeamSpeak server version and the connected query client's permissions.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tsget</i> is a utility that typically ships with or is closely associated with the TeamSpeak 3 server software. Its development has mirrored that of the TeamSpeak 3 server, providing a standardized command-line interface to the server's native query protocol, which was designed to allow third-party applications and scripts to interact with and manage TeamSpeak servers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help information and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tsort</i> (topological sort) is a command-line utility used to produce a linear ordering of vertices in a directed acyclic graph (DAG). It reads pairs of strings from its input, interpreting each pair as a directed edge from the first string to the second.<br><br>For example, "A B" means A must precede B in the output. The command outputs the items in an order such that if item X must precede item Y, then X appears before Y in the output. If the input contains a cycle (meaning it's not a DAG), <i>tsort</i> will detect it and report an error. It's commonly used in dependency management, for example, to determine the correct order for compiling files, linking libraries, or installing software packages where dependencies exist.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Input Format Specificity</b>: <i>tsort</i> strictly expects input as pairs of items, separated by whitespace, with one pair per line (e.g., "A B") or a single item per line. Input must be carefully formatted.<br><br><b>DAG Requirement</b>: It only works correctly on Directed Acyclic Graphs (DAGs). If the input graph contains cycles, <i>tsort</i> will detect them, exit with an error message, and report which elements form the cycle.<br><br><b>Non-Unique Order</b>: For graphs with multiple valid topological sorts (e.g., elements with no dependencies or parallel dependencies), <i>tsort</i> does not guarantee a specific order among those alternatives. The exact output might depend on the implementation details or the order of input lines.<br><br><b>Scalability</b>: While generally efficient for typical use cases, very large graphs might push its limits, though this is rare for simple text-based dependency tasks.


title: INPUT HANDLING
content:
<i>tsort</i> reads items from input, treating whitespace as separators. It expects pairs of items on a line defining a dependency (e.g., "A B" means A must precede B). If a line contains only one item, that item is treated as a node in the graph without any explicit dependencies shown on that line. Blank lines are ignored. Multiple arguments for FILE are not typical; generally, one file or standard input is used.


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
The output is a list of items, one per line, in topologically sorted order. If an item appears in the output, it means all its prerequisites have already appeared. If multiple valid topological sorts exist, <i>tsort</i> provides one of them.


title: ERROR HANDLING (CYCLES)
content:
If <i>tsort</i> detects a cycle in the input graph (meaning a set of dependencies that forms a closed loop, making a linear ordering impossible), it will print an error message to standard error, indicating the elements involved in the cycle, and exit with a non-zero status.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tsort</i> is a standard utility found in most Unix-like operating systems. It is part of the GNU Core Utilities, which provides essential command-line tools for GNU/Linux systems. Its core algorithm, topological sort, has been known and applied in computer science for decades, predating modern operating systems. Its presence in core utilities ensures its availability and consistency across different Linux distributions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-t, --type <NAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the type of spinner animation to display (e.g., 'dots', 'line', 'ascii').<br><br><b>-d, --delay <MILLISECONDS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the delay between animation frames in milliseconds, controlling the spinner's speed.<br><br><b>-m, --message <TEXT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a custom message next to the spinner.<br><br><b>-s, --start</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the spinner. If no message is provided, it might run indefinitely until a stop signal.<br><br><b>-x, --stop</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops a running spinner and clears its output line.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>tspin</I> command (a hypothetical utility) is designed to provide visual feedback for ongoing processes in a command-line environment. It displays a small, animating character sequence (a 'spinner') to indicate that a task is running and has not frozen. This is particularly useful for long-running scripts, data processing operations, network requests, or any command that performs work without immediate textual output. By showing a constant animation, it reassures the user that the system is active and the process is progressing. Users could typically specify the type of spinner animation, its speed, an accompanying message, and commands to start or stop the spinner.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Important Note:</b> The <I>tspin</I> command is <b>not a standard Linux command</b> found in typical distributions. This description is entirely hypothetical and designed to illustrate what such a command <I>could</I> do based on its name. If you encounter a 'tspin' command, it is likely a custom script, an alias, or an application-specific utility. Its actual functionality would depend entirely on its implementation.


title: IMPLEMENTING A SPINNER IN SHELL
content:
A basic terminal spinner can be implemented in a shell script using a loop, an array of characters for animation, and the <I>sleep</I> command for timing. Techniques like carriage return (<code>\r</code>) with <I>printf</I> are used to overwrite the current line, creating the animation effect without scrolling. <br>Example snippet (conceptual): <br><code>spin_chars=("-" "\\" "|" "/")<br>i=0<br>while true; do<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;i=$(( (i+1) % ${#spin_chars[@]} ))<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;printf "\r[%s] Loading..." "${spin_chars[$i]}"<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;sleep 0.1<br>done</code>


title: CUSTOM VS. STANDARD UTILITIES
content:
Many users create custom shell scripts or aliases for specific tasks to enhance their workflow. While powerful, these custom commands are not universally available. For cross-system compatibility, it's often better to rely on standard utilities or well-established third-party tools.


title: HISTORY
content:
As <I>tspin</I> is not a standard Linux command, there is no official development or usage history. Any existing instances would be part of custom scripts or niche projects without public historical records.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tsv-filter</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>TSV_FILE</i>]<br><b>tsv-filter</b> [<i>options</i>] &lt; <i>TSV_FILE</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-H</b>, <b>--header</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats the first line of the input file as a header row. This row will be passed directly to the output without being subject to filtering.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>fields</i>, <b>--fields</b> <i>fields</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a comma-separated list of field names or 1-based column numbers to apply the condition to. For example, 'C1,C3' or 'field_name'.<br><br><b><b>-C</b> <i>condition</i>, <b>--condition</b> <i>condition</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the filtering condition using <b>tsv-filter</b>'s expression language. Examples: 'C1 == "value"', 'C2 > 10', 'C3 ~ /pattern/', 'C4 in ("a", "b")', 'C5 is NA'.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>file</i>, <b>--output</b> <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs the output to the specified <i>file</i> instead of standard output (stdout).<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <b>tsv-filter</b> command and exits.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a help message detailing command usage and options, then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tsv-filter</b> command, part of the <i>tsv-utils</i> suite, is a powerful and efficient tool designed for filtering rows from Tab-Separated Values (TSV) files. It allows users to selectively include or exclude rows based on conditions applied to specific columns. <br><br>Utilizing a specialized expression language, <b>tsv-filter</b> can perform various types of comparisons, including equality, inequality, numerical comparisons, regular expression matching, and checking for `NA` (Not Available) values or membership in a list. This makes it highly versatile for data cleaning, subsetting, and analysis tasks. <br><br>Its design prioritizes performance, making it well-suited for processing large datasets. It can read from standard input or a specified file, and write to standard output or a designated output file, seamlessly integrating into command-line pipelines.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>tsv-filter</b>'s condition language is powerful but requires understanding its specific syntax for optimal use. Incorrectly formatted conditions can lead to errors. <br>While efficient, performance on extremely large files with very complex regular expressions might still be resource-intensive. Ensure sufficient memory for large datasets.


title: CONDITION LANGUAGE OVERVIEW
content:
The <b>tsv-filter</b> condition language supports various operators:<br><b>Comparison:</b> `==`, `!=`, `<`, `<=`, `>`, `>=` (for numbers and strings).<br><b>Regex Matching:</b> `~` (matches), `!~` (does not match).<br><b>Membership:</b> `in` (value in list), `!in` (value not in list).<br><b>Null/NA Check:</b> `is NA`, `is not NA`.<br><b>Logical Operators:</b> `&&` (AND), `||` (OR), `!` (NOT).<br><b>Parentheses:</b> For grouping expressions.<br>Column references are typically `C1`, `C2`, etc., or by header name if `-H` is used.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>tsv-filter</b> is a component of the <i>tsv-utils</i> project, an open-source suite of command-line tools developed by eBay Inc. The project was initiated to provide high-performance utilities specifically designed for manipulating large Tab-Separated Values (TSV) datasets, leveraging Go for its concurrency and speed. It has gained popularity among data engineers and analysts for its efficiency and clear syntax when working with structured text data.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>No standard synopsis exists for "tt" as it is not a default Linux command.<br>Its syntax, if defined, would be specific to its custom implementation (e.g., as an alias or a shell script).</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>N/A (Non-standard)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Since "tt" is not a universally recognized Linux command, it does not have a predefined set of parameters or options. Any arguments it might accept would be entirely dependent on its custom definition, whether it's an alias mapping to another command with specific options, or a shell script designed to take certain inputs. Users should refer to their local configuration or the source code of the custom "tt" implementation to understand its usage.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>The command "tt" is not a standard utility found in most default Linux distributions. Unlike common commands such as "ls" or "grep", "tt" typically signifies a user-defined alias, a custom shell script, or a component of a specialized, non-standard application. Its functionality, syntax, and behavior are therefore entirely dependent on how it has been locally configured or what specific software package it belongs to. Users encountering "tt" should investigate their local shell configuration (e.g., .bashrc, .zshrc) or installed software to determine its intended purpose. It is also often a common typo for commands like <b>tty</b> (teletypewriter) or even <b>traceroute</b>.<br><br>Because of its non-standard nature, attempting to execute "tt" on a typical system will usually result in a "command not found" error. This ambiguity makes it unique among common Linux command inquiries. It highlights the flexibility of Unix-like systems, where users can extend their command line interface with custom shortcuts and scripts. Therefore, understanding "tt" requires context specific to the environment in which it is being referenced. Without this context, any description of its function would be speculative.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>"tt" is fundamentally ambiguous on a generic Linux system. Users should not expect it to perform any action unless it has been explicitly defined in their environment. Running "tt" could result in a "command not found" error or, if custom-defined, execute an unintended action. Always verify its definition using commands like <b>type tt</b> or <b>alias tt</b> before execution.</i>


title: IDENTIFYING A CUSTOM 'TT' COMMAND
content:
<i>To check if "tt" is defined in your current shell environment, you can use the command <b>type tt</b>. This will indicate if it's an alias, function, or an executable in your PATH. If it's an alias, <b>alias tt</b> will show its definition. If it's a script, you might need to examine your PATH directories or system-wide configurations to understand its source and purpose.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>There is no general history for "tt" as a standalone Linux command because it is not one. Its 'history' is localized and exists only within specific user environments or niche software packages where it has been custom-defined as an alias, function, or script. Therefore, its development and usage are not documented universally but are part of individual system configurations.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <voice></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects a specific voice for synthesis. Examples: <i>en+f3</i> (English, female 3), <i>de</i> (German).<br><br><b>-s <speed></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the speaking speed in words per minute (WPM). Range typically 80-450, default is 175.<br><br><b>-p <pitch></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the base pitch of the voice. Range 0-99, default is 50.<br><br><b>-a <amplitude></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the amplitude (volume) of the speech. Range 0-200, default is 100.<br><br><b>-g <gap></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the pause between words in 10-millisecond units.<br><br><b>-w <wavfile></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the synthesized speech to a WAV audio file instead of playing it directly.<br><br><b>-f <textfile></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads input text from the specified file.<br><br><b>--stdin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads input text from standard input (stdin).<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses output messages to the console (quiet mode).<br><br><b>--voices[=<lang>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists available voices. Optionally specify a language to filter the list.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term <i>"tts"</i> refers to <i>Text-to-Speech</i> functionality in Linux, not a single standard command. While some users might create aliases or scripts named <code>tts</code>, the actual process involves dedicated command-line utilities. Common tools include <i><I>espeak</I></i>, <i><I>flite</I></i>, and <i><I>festival</I></i>, which synthesize spoken audio from input text. These tools are often used for accessibility, notification systems, or voice feedback in scripts. They typically take text as an argument or from standard input and output audio to the system's sound device or a WAV file. The capabilities, voice quality, and supported languages vary significantly between different TTS engines. For the purpose of this analysis, we will use <i><I>espeak</I></i> as a representative example, being one of the most common and versatile open-source TTS engines available on Linux.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <i><I>tts</I></i> itself is not a standard Linux command and typically refers to the Text-to-Speech concept. Its functionality depends entirely on installed TTS engines like <i><I>espeak</I></i>, <i><I>flite</I></i>, or <i><I>festival</I></i>. Voice quality and naturalness can vary greatly and may not always sound human-like. Requires audio output capabilities (sound card, drivers) or redirection to a WAV file for use.


title: COMMON USAGE PATTERNS
content:
A common pattern is piping text directly to a TTS engine or using the <i>-f</i> option to read from a file.<br>Example: <b>echo "Hello, world!" | espeak</b><br>Example: <b>espeak -f my_document.txt -v en-us+f2 -s 150 -w output.wav</b><br>For systems without direct audio output or for later playback, generating a WAV file is often preferred.


title: INTEGRATION WITH SHELL SCRIPTS
content:
TTS commands are frequently integrated into shell scripts for audible notifications, interactive prompts, or logging.<br>For instance, a script might announce the completion of a long-running task: <b>myscript && espeak "Task completed."</b><br>They can also be used in conjunction with other commands for creative outputs.


title: HISTORY
content:
The development of Text-to-Speech (TTS) systems on Unix-like operating systems dates back decades, with early academic and research projects laying the groundwork. Projects like <i><I>Festival</I></i> (developed at the University of Edinburgh) emerged in the mid-1990s, providing robust, research-oriented TTS capabilities. Later, more lightweight and compact engines like <i><I>Flite</I></i> (Fast Light Text-to-Speech Engine, CMU) and <i><I>eSpeak</I></i> (initially developed by Jonathan Duddington) gained prominence for their efficiency and suitability for embedded systems and command-line usage. These tools have continually evolved to support more languages, improve voice quality, and integrate with modern audio systems, becoming essential components for accessibility and automation in the Linux ecosystem.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
espeak(1): A compact open-source software text-to-speech synthesizer., flite(1): A small, fast run-time speech synthesis engine (from CMU Speech Group)., festival(1): A general multi-lingual speech synthesis system., aplay(1): Command-line sound player, often used to play WAV files generated by TTS engines.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>-s</B>, <B>--silent</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not print the name of the terminal. Only the exit status is important for scripting purposes.<br><br><b><B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><B>--version</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>tty</b> command is a fundamental Unix and Linux utility that prints the file name of the terminal or pseudo-terminal connected to standard input. In essence, it answers the question, "What terminal am I currently using?" This simple command is incredibly useful, especially within shell scripts, to determine if a script is running interactively on a terminal or as part of a background process, a pipeline, or a redirection.<br><br>When standard input is connected to a terminal device, <b>tty</b> will output the path to that device, for example, <i>/dev/pts/0</i> or <i>/dev/tty1</i>. If standard input is not connected to a terminal (e.g., if input is redirected from a file or a pipe), <b>tty</b> will output "not a tty" or similar (depending on implementation or specific setup), and crucially, will exit with a non-zero status. Its primary utility lies in its exit status, which allows scripts to make decisions based on whether an interactive session is present.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>tty</I> determines the terminal based on its standard input. If standard input is redirected from a file or a pipe, <I>tty</I> will indicate that it is not connected to a terminal, even if the shell running the command itself is interactive.<br>The exact string output when not connected to a TTY (e.g., "not a tty") might vary slightly across different Unix-like systems, though the non-zero exit status is consistent and more reliable for scripting.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
The exit status of the <I>tty</I> command is highly significant, especially in scripting:<br><br><B>0</B>: If standard input is a terminal device.<br><B>1</B>: If standard input is not a terminal device.<br><B>2</B>: If an invalid option is specified.<br><br>This allows shell scripts to conditionally execute commands or adjust behavior based on whether they are running in an interactive terminal session or not.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>tty</I> command is a very old and fundamental utility in Unix and Linux systems, tracing its roots back to early versions of Unix. It serves a basic yet essential function of identifying the terminal device. Its behavior and interface have remained remarkably consistent over decades, reflecting the stable nature of the underlying terminal device abstraction. It is part of the GNU Core Utilities (<I>coreutils</I>) package on Linux, ensuring its ubiquity and standardized behavior across distributions. Its simplicity and utility have ensured its continued presence as a core command-line tool.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables <i>compact mode</i>, reducing vertical plot space.<br><br><b>-r <rate></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the refresh rate in Hertz (Hz). Default is 10 Hz.<br><br><b>-u <unit></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a unit string to display on the Y-axis.<br><br><b>-s <scale></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a numerical scale factor to input data before plotting. Default is 1.0.<br><br><b>-m <min_value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a fixed minimum value for the Y-axis.<br><br><b>-M <max_value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a fixed maximum value for the Y-axis.<br><br><b>-t <title></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a custom title for the plot.<br><br><b>-b <buffer_size></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the number of samples to keep in the buffer and display on screen. Default is 1000.<br><br><b>-A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <i>always auto-scale</i> for the Y-axis, overriding any -m or -M settings.<br><br><b>-J</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;In multi-value input mode, joins points with lines instead of discrete points.<br><br><b>-B <char></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the background character used for the plot area. Default is '.'.<br><br><b>-F <char></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the foreground character used for plotting the data points. Default is '#'.<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables color output for the plot.<br><br><b>-g</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Draws grid lines on the plot.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>ttyplot</b> is a lightweight command-line utility designed for plotting real-time numerical data directly in your terminal. It reads numerical input from standard input (stdin) and renders it as a scrolling ASCII art graph. It's particularly useful for monitoring system metrics, network activity, or any continuous stream of numerical values generated by other commands like <i>vmstat</i>, <i>iostat</i>, <i>ping</i>, or custom scripts. <b>ttyplot</b> automatically scales the Y-axis by default, and allows customization of refresh rate, plot title, units, and appearance (colors, characters). Its simplicity and low resource usage make it an excellent tool for quick, live visualizations without needing a graphical environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Input Format:</b> <b>ttyplot</b> strictly expects numerical input on stdin. Non-numerical data will be ignored or can cause unexpected behavior.</li><li><b>Terminal Size:</b> The plot's appearance and visible buffer size are limited by the width and height of the terminal window.</li><li><b>Resource Usage:</b> While generally light, very high refresh rates with large buffer sizes can consume more CPU and memory, especially for complex, multi-value plots.</li><li><b>No History Saving:</b> The plots are real-time and ephemeral; there's no built-in way to save or export the plotted data or graph for later analysis.</li></ul>


title: COMMON USAGE PATTERNS
content:
<b>ttyplot</b> is most commonly used in conjunction with other Linux commands that output continuous streams of numerical data. Users typically pipe the output of commands like <i>vmstat</i>, <i>iostat</i>, or <i>ping</i> through text processing tools like <i>awk</i> or <i>sed</i> to extract the desired numerical column(s) before feeding them into <b>ttyplot</b>.<br><br><i>Example:</i> <code>vmstat 1 | awk '{print $15}' | ttyplot -t "Idle CPU %" -u "%" -C</code><br><br><i>Example for multiple values:</i> <code>vmstat 1 | awk '{print $13, $14}' | ttyplot -t "CPU User/System" -C -J</code>


title: MULTI-VALUE PLOTTING
content:
If <b>ttyplot</b> receives multiple space-separated numerical values on a single line of input, it will plot each value as a separate line on the graph. This allows for simultaneous visualization of related metrics.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-w, --width <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the <i>target width</i> for each line, in characters.<br><br><b>-a, --align <left|right|center></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify text <i>alignment</i> within the target width. Default is <i>left</i>.<br><br><b>-p, --pad <CHAR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use `CHAR` for <i>padding</i> to fill the width. Default is a space character.<br><br><b>-s, --strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enforce <i>strict width</i>; lines exceeding the target width will be truncated.<br><br><b>-n, --no-wrap</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable automatic line wrapping. Combined with <i>--strict</i>, this ensures a single line output.<br><br><b>-i, --indent <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a fixed <i>indentation</i> of <i>N</i> spaces to the beginning of each output line.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a <i>help message</i> with usage instructions and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output <i>version information</i> for <i>tuckr</i> and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tuckr</i> is a versatile command-line utility designed for reformatting and "tucking" text lines to fit specified width constraints. It provides granular control over line presentation, allowing users to precisely align text (left, right, or center) and fill remaining space with custom padding characters. This tool goes beyond basic line wrapping offered by utilities like <i>fold</i>, focusing on creating consistent, fixed-width output suitable for various applications.<br><br>Common use cases for <i>tuckr</i> include preparing log files for easier readability, formatting columnar data for reports, generating ASCII art, or ensuring text content adheres to specific display dimensions. Unlike simpler text formatters, <i>tuckr</i> can be configured to strictly enforce the target width by truncating overflowing lines, or to wrap them while maintaining the chosen alignment. Its robust set of options makes it an indispensable tool for anyone needing precise text layout control in a command-line environment, enhancing the clarity and structure of textual output.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Caveat</i>: The command <i>tuckr</i> is <b>not</b> a standard Linux utility and does not exist in common distributions. This analysis describes a <i>hypothetical</i> command, invented to demonstrate the requested JSON structure and formatting. Its functionality and existence are entirely fictional.


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<i>To left-align content from a file to 80 characters, using default padding:</i><br><code>tuckr -w 80 -a left document.txt</code><br><br><i>To center text from standard input to 50 characters, padding with hyphens:</i><br><code>cat input.log | tuckr -w 50 -a center -p '-'</code><br><br><i>To strictly format a list of items to 30 characters, truncating long lines:</i><br><code>tuckr -w 30 -s strict items.list</code>


title: HISTORY
content:
As a <i>hypothetical</i> command, <i>tuckr</i> has no real development history or usage evolution. In a real-world context, a utility with similar functionality might originate from a specific need for advanced text formatting in shell scripting, report generation, or log analysis, potentially evolving from simple shell scripts into more robust compiled programs to enhance performance and feature sets.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>[subreddit]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optionally specify a subreddit to open directly upon launching <b>tuir</b> (e.g., '<i>programming</i>').<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative path for the configuration file, overriding the default location.<br><br><b><b>--auth</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative path for the authentication token file, where Reddit credentials are stored.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>--clear-cache</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Clears the internal cache used by <b>tuir</b> and then exits. Useful for troubleshooting data inconsistencies.<br><br><b><b>--log</b> <i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the logging verbosity level. Common levels include <i>INFO</i>, <i>WARNING</i>, <i>ERROR</i>, or <i>DEBUG</i> for detailed output.<br><br><b><b>--theme</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a pre-defined theme to use for the interface's color scheme and styling.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message that lists all available command-line options and then exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tuir</b> is a powerful and highly configurable terminal user interface (TUI) client for browsing Reddit directly from your command line. It offers a fast and efficient way to navigate subreddits, view posts, read comments, and interact with the Reddit platform without the need for a web browser.<br><br>Written in Python, <b>tuir</b> provides a rich set of features including searching, upvoting, downvoting, commenting, subscribing to subreddits, and managing multiple user accounts. It supports viewing various content types, often leveraging external programs for images and videos. Designed for users who prefer a keyboard-driven workflow or operate in environments without graphical interfaces, <b>tuir</b> integrates seamlessly into a terminal-centric computing experience, offering a concise and productive way to consume Reddit content.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>tuir</b> operates within the confines of your terminal, meaning its rendering capabilities are dependent on terminal support for features like true colors and Unicode characters. While it can display images and videos, it typically relies on external command-line viewers (like <i>feh</i> or <i>mpv</i>) which must be installed and configured separately.<br><br>Initial user authentication for Reddit often requires a temporary browser interaction to obtain the necessary tokens. As an unofficial third-party client, its functionality could be impacted by changes to Reddit's API, potentially requiring updates to the application.


title: KEYBINDINGS AND NAVIGATION
content:
<b>tuir</b> is designed for keyboard-driven navigation, making it efficient for power users. Users can browse subreddits, posts, and comments, upvote, downvote, and interact with Reddit entirely through customizable keyboard shortcuts. Pressing '<b>?</b>' within the application typically displays a comprehensive help screen with common keybindings relevant to the current view.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
The application is highly configurable through a TOML-formatted configuration file (typically located at <i>~/.config/tuir/config.toml</i>). This file allows users to extensively customize themes, keybindings, external helper applications for media, and various other aspects of the user interface and behavior to tailor <b>tuir</b> to their preferences.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>tuir</b> emerged as a modern and actively maintained alternative to the original <i>Reddit Terminal Viewer (RTV)</i>, which saw periods of inactivity and lacked certain modern features. It was developed to address these limitations and introduce new functionalities, providing a robust and feature-rich experience for Reddit users who prefer a terminal-based interface.<br><br>Its development in Python allows for a high degree of customizability, cross-platform compatibility, and a more active development cycle compared to its spiritual predecessor.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the new volume label for the exFAT filesystem. The label can be up to 11 Unicode characters.<br><br><b>--label <I>new-label</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Long form of the -l option to set the new volume label.<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the new volume serial number for the exFAT filesystem. This is a 32-bit hexadecimal number.<br><br><b>--serial <I>new-serial</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Long form of the -i option to set the new volume serial number.<br><br><b><I>device</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The special file (e.g., <I>/dev/sdb1</I>) corresponding to the device or partition containing the exFAT filesystem.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tune.exfat</b> is a utility from the <I>exfatprogs</I> suite designed to modify various administrative parameters of an existing exFAT filesystem. Unlike more complex filesystems like ext4 or XFS, exFAT offers a limited set of tunable options.<br><br>Primarily, it allows administrators to change the volume label and the volume serial number of an exFAT filesystem directly on a device or partition. These changes are typically written directly to the filesystem's metadata. This command is useful for identifying volumes, especially when multiple exFAT filesystems are present, or for compliance with specific naming conventions.<br><br>It's crucial to unmount the filesystem before making changes to prevent data corruption.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Modifying filesystem parameters directly carries inherent risks; it is strongly recommended to unmount the exFAT filesystem before using <b>tune.exfat</b> to prevent potential data loss or corruption. Incorrect usage or interruptions during the process can lead to an unmountable or damaged filesystem.


title: HISTORY
content:
exFAT (Extended File Allocation Table) was developed by Microsoft primarily for flash memory such as USB flash drives and SD cards. Initially proprietary, Microsoft released specifications and patents for exFAT to the Open Invention Network (OIN) in 2019, paving the way for better native support in Linux. The <I>exfatprogs</I> package, which includes <b>tune.exfat</b>, provides robust open-source tools for managing exFAT filesystems on Linux, developed after this opening to ensure full compatibility and control over exFAT partitions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tune2fs</b> [ <i>options</i> ] <i>device</i><br><br>Common usage examples:<br><b>tune2fs -l</b> <i>/dev/sda1</i><br><b>tune2fs -c 30 -i 7d</b> <i>/dev/sdb1</i><br><b>tune2fs -j</b> <i>/dev/sdc1</i><br><b>tune2fs -O dir_index</b> <i>/dev/sdd1</i><br><b>tune2fs -L MyDataDisk</b> <i>/dev/sde1</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List the current contents of the filesystem superblock, including all tunable parameters and statistics.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>max-mount-counts</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the maximum number of times the filesystem may be mounted between two filesystem checks. A value of 0 or -1 disables this check.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>errors-behavior</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the behavior of the kernel when errors are detected. Options: <i>continue</i> (ignore errors), <i>remount-ro</i> (remount filesystem read-only), or <i>panic</i> (kernel panic).<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force the operation to complete, even if errors or potential issues (like a dirty journal) are detected. Use with caution.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>interval-between-checks</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the maximum time (in days) between two filesystem checks. A value of 0 disables the time-dependent check.<br><br><b><b>-j</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add an ext3 journal to the filesystem. This effectively converts an ext2 filesystem to ext3 or ext4 (if also enabling ext4 features).<br><br><b><b>-J</b> <i>journal-options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify options for the ext3 journal. E.g., <i>size=N</i> (journal size in MB), <i>device=external-journal</i> (use an external journal device).<br><br><b><b>-m</b> <i>reserved-blocks-percent</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the percentage of blocks reserved for the superuser. This ensures system stability even when the filesystem appears full to normal users.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> [<i>^</i>]<i>mount-options</i>[,...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or clear default mount options for the filesystem. Prepending with '^' clears the option. E.g., <i>acl</i>, <i>user_xattr</i>, <i>journal_data</i>.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>reserved-blocks-count</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the number of blocks reserved for the superuser, overriding the percentage set by <b>-m</b>.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> [<i>0|1</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or clear the sparse superblock feature. <i>0</i> clears, <i>1</i> sets. (Mostly deprecated in favor of <b>-O sparse_super</b>).<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>last-check-time</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the time the filesystem was last checked. This is an internal field, usually updated by <i>e2fsck</i> or <i>mount</i>.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>user</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the user ID (UID) or username who can use the reserved blocks. Can be a numeric UID or a username.<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>group</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the group ID (GID) or group name who can use the reserved blocks. Can be a numeric GID or a group name.<br><br><b><b>-O</b> [<i>^</i>]<i>feature</i>[,...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or clear filesystem features. Examples: <i>has_journal</i>, <i>dir_index</i>, <i>ext_attr</i>, <i>resize_inode</i>, <i>extent</i>. Prepending with '^' clears the feature.<br><br><b><b>-Q</b> <i>quota-options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set quota options for the filesystem. E.g., <i>usrquota</i>, <i>grpquota</i>, <i>pquota</i> (project quota).<br><br><b><b>-L</b> <i>volume-label</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the volume label of the filesystem (max 16 characters). This label can be used in <i>/etc/fstab</i> for mounting.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>last-mounted-directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the last mounted directory for the filesystem. (Informational only; updated by the <i>mount</i> command during actual mounts).<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>UUID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) of the filesystem. Can be a specific UUID, <i>clear</i> (remove UUID), <i>random</i> (generate new random UUID), or <i>time</i> (generate time-based UUID).<br><br><b><b>-E</b> <i>extended-options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set extended options for the filesystem, typically related to performance or specific hardware. E.g., <i>stride=N</i>, <i>stripe-width=N</i> (for RAID/LVM), <i>mmp_update_interval=N</i> (for Multiple Mount Protection).<br><br><b><b>-T</b> <i>time</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the time the filesystem was last checked. Can take various time formats like <i>now</i>, <i>today</i>, or a specific date/time (e.g., <i>20231027103000</i>).<br><br><b><i>device</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The block device or image file containing the ext2/ext3/ext4 filesystem to be modified (e.g., <i>/dev/sda1</i>, <i>/dev/mapper/vg0-lv0</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tune2fs</i> is a powerful utility for adjusting various tunable parameters of ext2, ext3, and ext4 filesystems. It allows system administrators to modify critical settings like the maximum mount count before an automatic filesystem check, the time interval between checks, the percentage of blocks reserved for the superuser, the volume label, and the universally unique identifier (UUID). Additionally, it's used for managing journaling options, converting an ext2 filesystem to ext3 or ext4 by adding a journal, and enabling or disabling filesystem features such as <i>dir_index</i> for optimized directory lookup. While many operations can be performed on a mounted filesystem, significant changes, especially to journaling or major feature flags, often require the filesystem to be unmounted or mounted read-only to prevent data corruption. <i>tune2fs</i> is an essential tool for fine-tuning filesystem behavior, enhancing stability, and customizing attributes without the need for a complete reformat.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Most modifications, especially those affecting journaling or major feature flags (e.g., using <b>-j</b> or <b>-O</b>), should be performed on an <b>unmounted</b> filesystem.<br><br>Applying <i>tune2fs</i> to a mounted, read-write filesystem can lead to data corruption or an unstable system.<br><br>Always back up important data before making significant changes to a filesystem, as incorrect usage can render it unmountable or corrupt its data.<br><br>Some operations, like adding a journal, can take a considerable amount of time depending on the filesystem size.


title: FILESYSTEM FEATURES (<B>-O</B> OPTION)
content:
The <b>-O</b> option allows granular control over various filesystem features that determine its capabilities and behavior. Examples include:<br><i>dir_index</i>: Enables HTree directories for faster directory lookups.<br><i>has_journal</i>: Enables journaling support (converts ext2 to ext3/ext4).<br><i>ext_attr</i>: Enables extended attributes support.<br><i>filetype</i>: Stores file type information in directory entries, improving some operations.<br><i>extent</i>: Enables ext4 extent support for efficient large file allocation. Enabling or disabling these features can significantly impact filesystem behavior, performance, and compatibility.


title: JOURNALING MANAGEMENT
content:
The <b>-j</b> option is used to add a journal to an ext2 filesystem, converting it to an ext3 or ext4 filesystem. This is a critical step for improving data integrity and recovery speed after a system crash by maintaining a log of metadata changes. The <b>-J</b> option provides further control over the journal, such as specifying its size (e.g., <i>size=128M</i>) or using an external device for the journal (e.g., <i>device=/dev/sdb5</i>), which can be beneficial for performance on busy systems by separating journal I/O from data I/O.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tune2fs</i> is a fundamental component of the <i>e2fsprogs</i> package, which provides essential utilities for managing ext2, ext3, and ext4 filesystems in Linux. Its development has paralleled the evolution of these filesystems, adapting to new features such as journaling (introduced with ext3) and various performance enhancements in ext4. It has been a cornerstone utility for Linux filesystem administration since the early days of ext2, continuously updated to support the latest filesystem capabilities and ensure system stability and performance.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tuned-adm</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>]<br><br>Common Commands:<br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm list</b><br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm active</b><br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm profile</b> <i>&lt;profile_name&gt;</i><br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm recommend</b><br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm off</b><br> &nbsp; <b>tuned-adm verify</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all available tuning profiles on the system, indicating the currently active one.<br><br><b><b>active</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the name of the currently active tuning profile.<br><br><b><b>profile</b> <i>&lt;profile_name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates the specified tuning profile. The profile will be applied immediately.<br><br><b><b>recommend</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Analyzes the system and recommends the most suitable tuning profile based on detected hardware and software characteristics.<br><br><b><b>off</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deactivates the <i>tuned</i> daemon and reverts the system to its default, untuned settings.<br><br><b><b>verify</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks whether the current system settings conform to the active tuning profile. Useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>auto_profile</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Switches <i>tuned</i> to automatically select and apply a profile based on system analysis, similar to 'recommend' but persistent.<br><br><b><b>monitor</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides real-time monitoring of <i>tuned</i>'s actions, showing when it applies or changes settings.<br><br><b><b>log</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays recent log entries from the <i>tuned</i> daemon, which can be useful for debugging.<br><br><b><b>profile_info</b> <i>&lt;profile_name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows detailed configuration parameters and settings defined within a specific tuning profile.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information for the <i>tuned-adm</i> utility.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a brief help message and usage information for the command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>tuned-adm</i> is the command-line interface for the <i>tuned</i> daemon, a dynamic system tuning tool.<br><br>It allows users to query, activate, deactivate, and manage various system tuning profiles. These profiles are designed to optimize system performance for specific use cases, such as <b>desktop</b>, <b>server</b>, <b>virtual host</b>, or <b>low-latency networking</b>, by automatically adjusting system parameters like CPU governors, I/O schedulers, swappiness, and kernel settings.<br><br><i>tuned-adm</i> simplifies system optimization, enabling administrators to tailor system behavior to diverse workloads without requiring deep manual configuration of individual components. It provides a robust and persistent way to ensure the system is always performing optimally for its intended purpose.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <i>tuned</i> daemon to be running for profile changes to take effect.<br>Applying a new profile can sometimes require a system reboot for all changes to be fully integrated, especially for kernel-level parameters.<br>Custom profiles must be correctly configured and placed in the appropriate directories to be recognized.<br><i>tuned-adm</i>'s changes may override manual system configurations, so it's important to understand its impact.


title: COMMON PROFILE EXAMPLES
content:
Some frequently used built-in tuning profiles include:<br> &nbsp; <b>balanced</b>: The default general-purpose profile.<br> &nbsp; <b>throughput-performance</b>: Optimizes for high-throughput server workloads, focusing on disk and network I/O.<br> &nbsp; <b>latency-performance</b>: Designed for low-latency applications, prioritizing CPU and network responsiveness.<br> &nbsp; <b>virtual-guest</b>: Optimized for efficiency and performance when running as a virtual machine.<br> &nbsp; <b>virtual-host</b>: Configured for systems hosting multiple virtual machines, balancing host and guest needs.<br> &nbsp; <b>powersave</b>: Reduces power consumption by prioritizing energy efficiency.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
Tuning profiles are typically defined in directories under <b>/usr/lib/tuned/</b>. Custom or overridden profiles should be placed in <b>/etc/tuned/</b>. Each profile directory contains a <b>tuned.conf</b> file that specifies the tuning parameters and scripts to be applied when the profile is active.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>tuned</i> and <i>tuned-adm</i> were developed by Red Hat, primarily for its enterprise Linux distributions (RHEL, Fedora, CentOS). It emerged as a solution to provide a consistent and robust way to manage system performance optimizations across various hardware and workload types. Its development aimed to simplify the complex task of manually tuning numerous system parameters, offering a profile-based approach that is both flexible and easy to manage, especially in server and data center environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <IRQ></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the interrupt request line</i> (IRQ) for the specified device. Useful for resolving IRQ conflicts.<br><br><b>-d <DMA></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel</i>. Typically 0, 1, or 3.<br><br><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the inactivity timeout</i> in jiffies (kernel ticks). A jiffy is typically 1/100th or 1/250th of a second depending on kernel configuration.<br><br><b>-c <MODE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the ECP (Extended Capabilities Port) mode</i>. Values can be 0 for byte mode, 1 for PS/2 mode, 2 for EPP mode, 3 for ECP mode. Specific values might depend on the hardware.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Resets the parallel port</i>. This can clear any errors or hung states.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the parallel port to auto-negotiate</i> its mode.<br><br><b>-P</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the poll time in microseconds</i>. Used when the port operates in polling mode instead of interrupt mode.<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enables or disables FIFO (First-In, First-Out) buffer</i> usage for the port. Value 0 for disable, 1 for enable.<br><br><b>-o</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Sets the out-of-paper retry interval</i>.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows the current status</i> of the parallel port settings without making changes. This is often used alone with the device name.<br><br><b><I>device</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the parallel port device file, e.g., <i><code>/dev/lp0</code></i>, <i><code>/dev/lp1</code></i>. This is a mandatory argument.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b><code>tunelp</code></b> command is a Linux utility designed to <i>examine</i> and <i>modify</i> the operating parameters of a parallel port, typically used for connecting older parallel printers. It allows administrators and users to query the current status of a specified parallel port device (e.g., <code>/dev/lp0</code>) and to configure various hardware-level settings.<br><br>These settings include the Interrupt Request (IRQ) line, Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and parallel port mode (such as ECP - Extended Capabilities Port). While crucial for troubleshooting and optimizing performance of legacy parallel devices, <b><code>tunelp</code> is largely considered obsolete</b> in modern Linux environments due to the widespread adoption of USB and network-based printers, which do not utilize parallel ports. Nevertheless, it remains valuable in specific niche scenarios involving older hardware or embedded systems that still rely on parallel port communication. Its primary function is to directly interact with the kernel's parallel port driver to fine-tune its behavior.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Obsolete Hardware</b>: <code>tunelp</code> is designed for traditional parallel ports (LPT ports), which are rarely found on modern computers. Most printers today connect via USB or network.</li><li><b>Kernel Module Dependency</b>: It requires the parallel port kernel module (e.g., <code>lp</code>, <code>parport</code>) to be loaded and configured correctly.</li><li><b>Root Privileges</b>: Modifying parallel port settings typically requires <i>root privileges</i>.</li><li><b>Limited Scope</b>: It only affects the low-level parallel port driver parameters and does not directly control printer-specific features like print queues or print jobs, which are handled by print spoolers like CUPS.</li><li><b>System Instability</b>: Incorrectly setting IRQ or DMA channels can lead to system instability or conflicts with other hardware.</li></ul>


title: DEVICE NAMING
content:
Parallel port devices are typically named <i><code>/dev/lp0</code></i>, <i><code>/dev/lp1</code></i>, etc., or sometimes <i><code>/dev/parport0</code></i>, <i><code>/dev/parport1</code></i>. The <code>lp</code> devices are specific to the printer driver, while <code>parport</code> devices are for general parallel port access.


title: JIFFIES
content:
The <code>-t</code> timeout parameter uses "jiffies," which is a unit of time defined by the kernel. The exact duration of a jiffy (e.g., 1ms, 4ms, 10ms) varies depending on the kernel's HZ compile-time option (e.g., 100, 250, 1000). Users should be aware that setting timeouts requires understanding their system's jiffy rate.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <code>tunelp</code> command has been a part of Linux distributions since the early days of the kernel, reflecting the prominence of parallel ports as the primary printer interface before the advent of USB. Its development closely followed the evolution of the Linux parallel port driver (<code>parport</code> and <code>lp</code> modules), providing a user-space interface to configure and debug these hardware components. While its importance has diminished significantly with technological advancements, it represents a historical component of Linux system administration for hardware control. It has remained largely unchanged in its core functionality for many years, primarily due to the stable nature of parallel port hardware standards.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays C-state residency (CPU idle states).<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows interrupt information per CPU.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides P-state (frequency) residency information.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays S-state (system sleep states) residency.<br><br><b>-M</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows M-state (memory) residency, if supported by hardware.<br><br><b>-T</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reports package temperature (requires hardware support).<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help message and exits.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses header output, useful for scripting.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints raw counter values.<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Summarizes output across all CPUs or packages.<br><br><b><I>interval</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The time in seconds between each sample. If omitted, it defaults to a single output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<B>turbostat</B> is a command-line tool that reports real-time information about processor topology, frequencies, idle states (C-states), power consumption, and temperatures. It's invaluable for analyzing CPU performance and power management. The command leverages Model Specific Registers (MSRs) and sysfs to gather detailed data, including actual CPU core frequencies (which can exceed base frequencies due to <B>Intel Turbo Boost</B> or <B>AMD Precision Boost</B>), time spent in various power-saving states, and thermal data. It helps system administrators and developers identify power inefficiencies, CPU throttling, or performance bottlenecks by providing insights into how aggressively a CPU is utilizing its available power and clock speed ranges.<BR><BR>Note: The command <B>"turbo"</B> is not a standard, standalone Linux command. This analysis assumes the user may be referring to <B>"turbostat"</B>, a widely used tool for monitoring CPU turbo frequencies and power states.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>turbostat</B> typically requires <B>root privileges</B> (or <I>CAP_SYS_RAWIO</I> capability) to access MSRs.<BR>The availability and accuracy of certain metrics depend heavily on the <B>CPU architecture</B> and its support for specific MSRs. Output can be complex and may require understanding of CPU power management concepts.


title: UNDERSTANDING C-STATES AND P-STATES
content:
<I>C-states</I> (Idle States) refer to different levels of CPU inactivity, ranging from C0 (active) to deeper states like C1, C3, C6, where parts of the CPU are powered down to save energy. <B>turbostat</B> reports the time spent in each.<BR><I>P-states</I> (Performance States) refer to different operating frequencies and voltages for the CPU. <B>turbostat</B> shows the actual frequency distribution, including frequencies above the nominal clock speed when Turbo Boost/Precision Boost is active.


title: HISTORY
content:
<B>turbostat</B> is part of the <I>linux-tools</I> package, a collection of performance monitoring and debugging utilities for the Linux kernel. Its development is closely tied to advancements in CPU power management and performance features like Intel's Turbo Boost Technology, providing a direct interface to monitor these sophisticated hardware capabilities. It's primarily developed and maintained by Intel engineers as part of the open-source Linux kernel effort.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-b, --build</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Builds (transpiles) the source files.<br><br><b>-m, --minified</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates minified JavaScript output.<br><br><b>-o &lt;dir&gt;, --output_dir &lt;dir&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the directory for the generated JavaScript.<br><br><b>-n, --nomin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the generation of minified JavaScript, ensuring readable output.<br><br><b>-r, --reset</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes the __pycache__ and __target__ directories.<br><br><b>-c, --clean</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Cleans the __pycache__ and __target__ directories before building.<br><br><b>-p, --project</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Transpiles a complete project rather than just a single file.<br><br><b>--map</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates source maps, aiding in debugging the transpiled JavaScript.<br><br><b>--standalone</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produces JavaScript suitable for direct inclusion in a web page.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information and progress during transpilation.<br><br><b>--amd</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates JavaScript optimized for Asynchronous Module Definition (AMD).<br><br><b>--cjs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates JavaScript optimized for CommonJS module systems.<br><br><b>--es6</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates JavaScript optimized for ECMAScript 2015 (ES6) module systems.<br><br><b>--target &lt;version&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target Python version for compatibility (e.g., <i>3.9</i>).<br><br><b>--polyglot</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables polyglot mode, allowing inline JavaScript within Python code.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the help message.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows program's version number.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>transcrypt</b> is an open-source Python-to-JavaScript transpiler that enables developers to write client-side web applications using Python syntax. It converts Python source code into highly readable and optimized JavaScript code, allowing Python developers to leverage their existing skills for front-end development. <b>transcrypt</b> aims for a high degree of compatibility with Python 3.x, supporting many built-in functions, data types, and standard library modules.<br><br>It generates native JavaScript, avoiding heavy runtime dependencies, which contributes to smaller file sizes and faster execution in web browsers. Key features include source map generation for easier debugging, support for various module systems (like CommonJS and ES modules), and the ability to minify the output for production environments. It effectively bridges the gap between Python's powerful ecosystem and the ubiquitous nature of JavaScript in the browser.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Python Subset</b>: Not all Python features are supported; browser environment limitations apply (e.g., direct file I/O, multiprocessing, C extensions).<br><b>Debugging</b>: While source maps help, debugging complex interactions in the transpiled JavaScript can still be challenging.<br><b>Performance</b>: For highly performance-critical code, hand-written JavaScript or TypeScript might offer more fine-grained control.<br><b>External Libraries</b>: Python libraries with C extensions or deep system integrations cannot be directly used; JavaScript equivalents or <b>transcrypt</b>-compatible versions are required.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<b>transcrypt</b> can typically be installed using Python's package manager: <i>pip install transcrypt</i>.


title: BASIC USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To transpile a simple Python file named <i>hello.py</i> into the <i>__target__</i> directory: <i>transcrypt hello.py</i>.


title: PROJECT STRUCTURE
content:
For larger projects, <b>transcrypt</b> can be run on a directory, automatically transpiling all Python files within it while maintaining relative paths in the output.


title: HISTORY
content:
Transcrypt was initiated by Jacques de Hooge and first released in 2014. It emerged as a solution for Python developers to target the web browser without the overhead of Emscripten or larger runtime dependencies. Its development has continuously focused on generating clean, efficient, and readable JavaScript, aiming for maximum compatibility with Python 3.x and modern web standards, with ongoing additions of support for new Python features, module systems, and improved tooling like source maps.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>tshark</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>capture-filter</i>] [<i>display-filter</i>]<br><b>tshark</b> -i <i><interface></i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>capture-filter</i>]<br><b>tshark</b> -r <i><file></i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>display-filter</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <interface></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network <i>interface</i> to capture live packets from (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>wlan0</i>).<br><br><b>-r <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads packets from the specified <i>capture file</i> (e.g., <i>.pcap</i>, <i>.pcapng</i>).<br><br><b>-w <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the captured raw packet data to the specified <i>output file</i>.<br><br><b>-Y <display-filter></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a <i>display filter</i> to packets after capture or reading, controlling what is shown (e.g., <i>tcp.port == 80</i>).<br><br><b>-f <capture-filter></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a <i>capture filter</i> (BPF syntax) to limit which packets are captured directly at the interface (e.g., <i>'port 22'</i>).<br><br><b>-c <count></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops capturing or reading after <i>count</i> packets have been processed.<br><br><b>-s <snaplen></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>snapshot length</i> (bytes to capture per packet), truncating packets longer than <i>snaplen</i>.<br><br><b>-T <pdml|ps|psml|text|json|jsonraw|jsonproto></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output format. Common options include <i>text</i> for human-readable output or <i>json</i> for machine-readable data.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds verbose packet details, showing full dissection trees for each packet.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables <i>quiet mode</i>, suppressing standard output of packet dissections. Useful when only statistics or writes to file are needed.<br><br><b>-z <stats></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Collects and displays various statistics, such as <i>io,phs</i> for protocol hierarchy statistics.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tshark</b> is the powerful command-line version of the popular network protocol analyzer, <i>Wireshark</i>. It allows users to capture live network traffic from an interface, or read and analyze packets from a previously saved capture file (e.g., <i>.pcap</i>, <i>.pcapng</i>). <b>tshark</b> supports a vast array of network protocols for dissection and analysis.<br><br>It's an invaluable tool for network troubleshooting, security analysis, protocol development, and education. Users can apply sophisticated <i>capture filters</i> to limit the data captured, and <i>display filters</i> to narrow down the packets shown for analysis. Its command-line nature makes it ideal for scripting, automation, and remote server analysis where a graphical interface is not available. <b>tshark</b> can output dissection results in various formats, including plain text, XML, JSON, and PostScript, providing flexibility for integration with other tools.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Live packet capturing with <b>tshark</b> often requires elevated privileges (e.g., <i>root</i> or <i>sudo</i>) to access network interfaces. Capturing large volumes of traffic can quickly consume disk space. Understanding <i>Wireshark's display filter syntax</i> and <i>BPF capture filter syntax</i> is crucial for effective use. Resource usage can be high, particularly with complex dissections or high-bandwidth interfaces.


title: CAPTURE FILTERS VS. DISPLAY FILTERS
content:
It's important to distinguish between <i>capture filters</i> (specified with <b>-f</b>) and <i>display filters</i> (specified with <b>-Y</b>).<br><br><i>Capture filters</i> are applied at the very beginning of the capture process by the packet capture library (e.g., <i>libpcap</i>). They reduce the amount of data saved to disk or processed, enhancing efficiency but irreversibly discarding unmatched packets.<br><br><i>Display filters</i> are applied after packets have been captured or read from a file. They only control which packets are shown or processed for analysis, without discarding the underlying raw data. This allows for flexible post-capture analysis of the full dataset.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>tshark</b> is an integral part of the <i>Wireshark</i> suite of tools. <i>Wireshark</i>, originally named <i>Ethereal</i>, was created by <i>Gerald Combs</i> in 1998. It was renamed to <i>Wireshark</i> in 2006 due to trademark issues. <b>tshark</b> provides the same powerful dissection engine as its graphical counterpart but in a command-line interface, making it highly versatile for remote analysis, scripting, and integration into automated workflows.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>No standard synopsis available.</i><br>The 'tuc' command is not a recognized utility in typical Linux distributions. Execution will likely result in a 'command not found' error.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>N/A</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;No standard parameters are defined as 'tuc' is not a recognized Linux command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The 'tuc' command is <b>not a standard or widely recognized utility</b> within typical Linux distributions. It does not appear in common command lists, official documentation, or standard package repositories. It is highly probable that 'tuc' might be a typographical error for other common commands such as 'tac' (which outputs file content in reverse order) or 'cut' (which extracts sections from lines of files).<br><br>Without specific context regarding a custom build, a specialized environment, or a particular user-defined script, a detailed analysis of 'tuc''s functionality, options, and usage is not possible. Users encountering 'tuc' should verify its origin in their specific system or environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The primary caveat is that 'tuc' is <b>not a standard command</b> and will likely cause a 'command not found' error on most Linux systems. If 'tuc' exists in a particular environment, it would be a custom script or executable, and its behavior, security implications, and resource usage would depend entirely on that specific, non-standard implementation.<br><br>Users should exercise caution if they find a 'tuc' executable in an unusual path, as it could be a malicious or poorly designed custom utility.


title: <I>NON-STANDARD STATUS</I>
content:
It is crucial to understand that 'tuc' is not part of the GNU Core Utilities or any other standard Linux command set. Its presence on a system indicates a custom installation or a highly specialized environment.


title: <I>TYPOGRAPHICAL ERROR POTENTIAL</I>
content:
Given its phonetic similarity, 'tuc' is frequently considered a typographical error for more common and standard commands like 'tac' (reverse file output) or 'cut' (extract fields).


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>No documented history exists for 'tuc' as it is not a standard or widely adopted Linux command. Its origins, if any, would be specific to custom implementations.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the command's hypothetical version information.<br><br><b>-i <category>, --info=<category></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays specific system information. Categories could include 'kernel', 'uptime', 'distro', or 'hostname'.<br><br><b>-m, --message</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs a random Tux-themed message, quote, or piece of Linux trivia.<br><br><b>-l, --list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists available categories for the --info option or types of messages for --message.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Please note: The 'tuxi' command is <B>not a standard, widely recognized Linux utility</B> found in common distributions. <br><br>This analysis provides a <I>hypothetical description</I> based on the command's potential naming convention, treating it as a lightweight tool designed to display fundamental system information or engaging, often humorous, messages related to the Linux ecosystem and its mascot, Tux. <br><br>If 'tuxi' were to exist, it might serve as a quick diagnostic tool for users to retrieve essential details about their system's kernel, uptime, or distribution, or simply offer a moment of levity through curated 'Tux wisdom'. Its design would prioritize simplicity and rapid output, making it suitable for quick checks in terminal environments. Hypothetically, 'tuxi' aims to be user-friendly, requiring minimal configuration and providing immediate, relevant feedback to the user regarding their Linux system's current state or offering lighthearted commentary, making it a playful yet potentially informative addition to a Linux user's toolkit. It would embody the spirit of Linux: powerful yet accessible, and often with a touch of community-driven humor.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The 'tuxi' command is <B>not a standard Linux utility</B> and is presented here as a <I>hypothetical concept</I>. Users will likely not find it available in typical Linux distribution repositories or core command sets. Any functionality described is purely illustrative and conceptual.


title: COMMAND STATUS CLARIFICATION
content:
It is <B>crucial to understand</B> that 'tuxi' is <I>not a genuine or commonly available command</I> in standard Linux distributions. This analysis is provided for illustrative purposes based on a potential interpretation of its name. Users attempting to execute 'tuxi' on their systems will most likely encounter a '<I>command not found</I>' error.


title: CONCEPTUAL USE CASES
content:
If 'tuxi' were real, it could be used by new Linux users for quick system checks, or by enthusiasts looking for a lighthearted terminal interaction. Its simplicity would make it ideal for scripting basic system health reports or customizing shell prompts with dynamic Tux-themed messages, adding a touch of Linux personality to the command line.


title: HISTORY
content:
As a <B>hypothetical command</B>, 'tuxi' has no real-world development history. If it were to be developed, its inception might stem from a desire for a simple, unified command to quickly glean essential system information or to share playful, community-driven content, embodying the spirit of the Linux ecosystem. Its usage would likely grow within a niche community interested in lightweight system diagnostics or terminal-based entertainment, potentially evolving with contributions from developers passionate about concise and user-friendly tools.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>twine [global-options] &lt;command&gt; [command-options] [arguments]</code><br><br><i>Common commands:</i><br><code>twine upload [options] &lt;package_files...&gt;</code><br><code>twine check &lt;package_files...&gt;</code><br><code>twine --version</code><br><code>twine --help</code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Show the version and exit.</i><br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Show this message and exit.</i><br><br><b>--config-file &lt;path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The path to the configuration file to use. Defaults to ~/.pypirc.</i><br><br><b>--username &lt;username&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The username to authenticate with. Defaults to __token__ for PyPI.</i><br><br><b>--password &lt;password&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The password or API token to authenticate with.</i><br><br><b>--repository &lt;name&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The repository name configured in your .pypirc file. Defaults to pypi.</i><br><br><b>--repository-url &lt;url&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The URL of the repository to upload to. Overrides --repository.</i><br><br><b>--cert &lt;path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Path to CA certificate bundle to use.</i><br><br><b>--client-cert &lt;path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Path to a client certificate to use.</i><br><br><b>--disable-progress-bar</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Disable the progress bar.</i><br><br><b>upload --sign</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>GPG sign files prior to upload.</i><br><br><b>upload --identity &lt;identity&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>GPG identity used to sign files.</i><br><br><b>upload --non-interactive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Do not prompt for input.</i><br><br><b>upload --skip-existing</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Skip files that already exist on the repository.</i><br><br><b>upload --comment &lt;comment&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Add a comment to the upload.</i><br><br><b>upload --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Display verbose output.</i><br><br><b>upload --dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Do not actually upload the files, just print what would be done.</i><br><br><b>check --strict</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Fail if any warnings are found during checking.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><code>twine</code> is a utility designed for securely uploading Python packages (wheels and source distributions) to the Python Package Index (PyPI) and other compatible package repositories. It provides essential security features, such as cryptographic signing of distributions (when using GPG) and hash checking, ensuring the integrity and authenticity of uploaded packages. Unlike the deprecated <code>python setup.py upload</code> command, <code>twine</code> uploads files serially and verifies the hashes, making it a more robust and secure choice for Python package distribution. It is widely used by Python developers and automated build systems to publish their libraries and applications to the global Python community.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><code>twine</code> requires internet connectivity to communicate with package repositories. Authentication credentials (username/password or API tokens) are sensitive and should be handled securely, ideally using environment variables or a <code>.pypirc</code> file with restricted permissions. While <code>twine</code> enforces secure upload practices, it does not validate the content or security of the Python packages themselves; that responsibility lies with the package author and the repository's review process.</i>


title: API TOKENS
content:
<i>For enhanced security, it is highly recommended to use PyPI API tokens instead of your username and password. API tokens can be scoped to specific projects and have fine-grained permissions, reducing the risk if compromised. Store them in <code>~/.pypirc</code> or use the <code>TWINE_PASSWORD</code> environment variable.</i>


title: <CODE>~/.PYPIRC</CODE> CONFIGURATION
content:
<i><code>twine</code> reads authentication and repository information from a <code>~/.pypirc</code> file by default. This file allows you to configure multiple repositories and store credentials, making repeated uploads more convenient and secure than typing credentials every time.</i>


title: PRE-UPLOAD CHECKING
content:
<i>Before uploading, it's good practice to run <code>twine check &lt;package_files...&gt;</code> to validate that your distribution files are well-formed and meet PyPI's requirements. This can help catch metadata errors or malformed packages before an actual upload attempt.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><code>twine</code> was created to address security and reliability issues present in the legacy <code>python setup.py upload</code> command. The original method was prone to network issues and lacked robust security features like hash verification. Developed by the Python Packaging Authority (PyPA), <code>twine</code> became the recommended and standard tool for uploading Python distributions to PyPI, significantly improving the security and robustness of the Python package distribution workflow since its inception around 2013-2014.</i>


title: SEE ALSO
content:
pip(1): <i>Python package installer.</i>, build(1): <i>Build Python packages.</i>, python(1): <i>The Python interpreter.</i>, pypirc(5): <i>The .pypirc configuration file format.</i>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>twistd</b> [<i>global_options</i>] [<i>application_options</i>]<br><br>The most common usage involves specifying an application file:<br><b>twistd</b> [<i>global_options</i>] <b>-y</b> <i>application.tac|py</i><br><br><b>twistd</b> also supports various built-in plugins/applications:<br><b>twistd</b> [<i>global_options</i>] <i><plugin_name></i> [<i>plugin_specific_options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-y</b> <i>file</i>, <b>--python=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Python application file (<br><i>.tac</i> or <i>.py</i>) that <b>twistd</b> should run.<br>This is the most common way to define the application.<br><br><b><b>--logfile=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects all standard output and error to the<br>specified log file. This is crucial for capturing<br>application logs when running as a daemon.<br><br><b><b>--pidfile=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates and manages a PID file at the given path.<br>This file contains the process ID of the running<br><b>twistd</b> instance, used for stopping or checking<br>the daemon's status.<br><br><b><b>--uid=</b><i>uid</i>, <b>--gid=</b><i>gid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the process's effective user ID (UID)<br>and group ID (GID) after startup. This is a<br>security measure to run the application with reduced privileges.<br><br><b><b>--chroot=</b><i>directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the root directory of the process using<br><i>chroot()</i>. This creates an isolated environment,<br>enhancing security by limiting file system access.<br><br><b><b>--nodaemon</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <b>twistd</b> from detaching from the<br>controlling terminal. Useful for debugging<br>applications directly in the foreground.<br><br><b><b>--syslog</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs log output to the system's syslog service instead of a file.<br><br><b><b>--reactor=</b><i>name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies which Twisted reactor to use<br>(e.g., <i>epoll</i>, <i>kqueue</i>, <i>poll</i>, <i>select</i>).<br>This can influence performance on different operating systems.<br><br><b><b>--stop</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sends a shutdown signal to a running <b>twistd</b> daemon,<br>typically causing it to terminate gracefully. Requires a PID file<br>to be specified with <b>--pidfile</b>.<br><br><b><b>--reopen</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Causes <b>twistd</b> to close and re-open its log files,<br>useful for log rotation utilities like <i>logrotate</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>twistd</b> is a command-line tool provided by the <br>Twisted network programming framework for Python.<br>Its primary purpose is to run Twisted applications<br>as robust, long-running daemon processes in the background.<br>It handles many common tasks associated with daemonization,<br>abstracting away complexities like detaching from the controlling terminal,<br>redirecting standard I/O (stdin, stdout, stderr) to files,<br>creating and managing a Process ID (PID) file,<br>and optionally changing the process's user and group permissions<br>for enhanced security. <b>twistd</b> loads a specified Python application<br>(typically a <i>.tac</i> file or a Python script using <i>twistd.run()</i>)<br>and manages its lifecycle, allowing for graceful startup, shutdown,<br>and error handling. It's an indispensable tool for deploying production-grade<br>Twisted servers and services, ensuring they operate reliably<br>and independently of the user's session.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Twisted Dependency</b>: <b>twistd</b> requires the Twisted framework<br>to be installed in the Python environment where it's executed.</li><br><li><b>Debugging</b>: Debugging a daemonized application can be challenging.<br>Using the <b>--nodaemon</b> option during development is highly recommended<br>to run the application in the foreground and see immediate output.</li><br><li><b>PID File Management</b>: Proper management of the PID file specified<br>with <b>--pidfile</b> is crucial. If the PID file is not cleaned up<br>after an abnormal shutdown, <b>twistd</b> might refuse to start,<br>indicating a false "already running" condition.</li><br><li><b>Application Structure</b>: The application file (<i>.tac</i> or <i>.py</i>)<br>must correctly define a Twisted application callable (an <i>Application</i> object)<br>for <b>twistd</b> to execute it.</li></ul>


title: APPLICATION FILE TYPES (.TAC VS .PY)
content:
<b>twistd</b> primarily expects a Twisted Application configuration file,<br>traditionally named with a <i>.tac</i> extension. These files contain a variable<br>named <i>application</i> which is an instance of <i>twisted.application.service.Application</i>.<br>While <i>.py</i> files can also be used, they typically require a call to<br><i>twistd.run()</i> within the script itself, making <i>.tac</i> files the preferred<br>and more standard approach for <b>twistd</b> deployments as they directly define<br>the application object without needing an explicit <i>run</i> call.


title: STOPPING AND RESTARTING DAEMONS
content:
To gracefully stop a <b>twistd</b> daemon, use<br><b>twistd --pidfile=/path/to/pidfile.pid --stop</b>.<br>This sends a <i>TERM</i> signal, allowing the application to shut down cleanly.<br>If the daemon doesn't respond, a <b>kill -9</b> (<i>SIGKILL</i>) might be necessary,<br>but it should be avoided as it prevents graceful shutdown. For restarting,<br>a common pattern is to <b>--stop</b> and then start a new instance. Some system<br>service managers (like <i>systemd</i>) handle this orchestration automatically.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>twistd</b> emerged as a core component of the Twisted network<br>programming framework, which began development around the year 2000.<br>Its creation was driven by the need for a robust and standardized way<br>to deploy long-running server applications written with Twisted.<br>Before <b>twistd</b>, developers had to implement their own daemonization logic,<br>which was error-prone and inconsistent. <b>twistd</b> centralized these common<br>daemonization tasks, making it significantly easier to deploy and manage<br>Twisted-based services, ensuring they could run reliably in production<br>environments and integrate smoothly with standard Unix process management<br>utilities. It has evolved alongside the Twisted framework, adapting to new<br>operating system features and Python versions.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>python</b>(1), <b>kill</b>(1), <b>ps</b>(1), <b>nohup</b>(1), <b>systemd</b>(1), <b>init.d</b>(8)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-f initfile</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file to load instead of the default <i>~/.twmrc</i>.<br><br><b><i>-s</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a short startup message on the console when <i><b>twm</b></i> starts.<br><br><b><i>-d displayname</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to the specified X display. This overrides the <i>DISPLAY</i> environment variable.<br><br><b><i>-v</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version number of <i><b>twm</b></i> and then exits.<br><br><b><i>-q</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the display of the startup message on the console.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>twm</b></i>, the Tab Window Manager, is a basic and lightweight window manager for the X Window System. It was one of the earliest window managers developed for X11, providing fundamental features like titlebars for windows, resize and minimize/maximize buttons, and an icon manager. Users interact with <i><b>twm</b></i> primarily through mouse clicks on the root window or window borders, often bringing up configurable menus.<br><br>Known for its minimalist design and low resource consumption, <i><b>twm</b></i> is highly configurable through a plain-text configuration file, typically <i>~/.twmrc</i>. This file allows users to define key bindings, mouse bindings, colors, fonts, and window placement rules. While lacking the modern visual aesthetics and advanced features of contemporary desktop environments, <i><b>twm</b></i> remains functional and is often used in environments where resources are extremely limited, for troubleshooting X setups, or by users preferring a very spartan and keyboard/mouse-driven interface.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>twm</b></i> is an old window manager with a very simple aesthetic, lacking modern desktop features such as compositing, taskbars, or sophisticated desktop environments.<br><br>Its configuration is entirely text-file based (<i>.twmrc</i>) and can be complex for new users, requiring manual editing and understanding of its specific syntax. It's not suitable for users expecting a rich, graphical, or user-friendly out-of-the-box experience found in modern desktop environments.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (.TWMRC)
content:
The primary way to customize <i><b>twm</b></i> is through its configuration file, typically named <i>.twmrc</i>, located in the user's home directory. This file is a plain text file that uses a specific syntax to define menus, key bindings, mouse bindings, colors, fonts, and window-specific behaviors. Understanding and editing this file is essential for anyone wishing to adapt <i><b>twm</b></i> to their preferences.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>twm</b></i> was originally written by Tom LaStrange for the X Window System in 1987. It was included as part of X11R1 (X Version 11 Release 1) and quickly became the standard window manager for X. Its inclusion helped popularize the X Window System by providing a basic, functional graphical interface. Despite its age, it remains part of the X.Org distribution, serving as a fallback or a choice for minimalist setups.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-T<format></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output format. Common formats include <b>dot</b> (Graphviz native format with layout), <b>png</b>, <b>svg</b>, <b>pdf</b>, etc.<br><br><b>-o <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file name. If omitted, output goes to standard output.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints version information for <b>twopi</b> and exits.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints a usage message (help) and exits.<br><br><b>-G<name>=<value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a global graph attribute. For example, <I>-Gbgcolor=lightgrey</I> or <I>-Goverlap=scale</I>.<br><br><b>-N<name>=<value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a default node attribute. For example, <I>-Nshape=circle</I> or <I>-Ncolor=blue</I>.<br><br><b>-E<name>=<value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a default edge attribute. For example, <I>-Ecolor=red</I> or <I>-Earrowhead=none</I>.<br><br><b>-s[<level>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints progress messages to standard error. An optional level can specify verbosity, e.g., <I>-s2</I>.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the layout process.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses warning messages during processing.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>twopi</b> is one of the specialized layout programs provided by the <I>Graphviz</I> graph visualization software suite. Its primary function is to lay out graphs in a radial fashion, arranging nodes on concentric circles. This makes it particularly effective for visualizing large, highly connected graphs where a central node or a set of central nodes connects to many others, creating a "star-like" or "wheel-like" structure. <br><br><b>twopi</b> takes a graph description in the <I>DOT language</I> as input, either from a file or standard input, and produces output in various formats such as DOT (with layout coordinates), SVG, PNG, PDF, and others. Unlike some other Graphviz layout engines that optimize for minimizing edge crossings or uniform node distribution, <b>twopi</b> focuses on revealing hierarchical or central relationships through its circular arrangement, positioning nodes based on their distance from a designated root or central point within the graph.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>twopi</b> is a component of the <I>Graphviz</I> suite, not a standard core Linux command. It must be installed separately as part of the Graphviz package. Its radial layout algorithm is specifically designed for graphs with a clear central node or a hub-and-spoke structure, and may not yield optimal or intuitive layouts for all types of graphs, particularly those requiring strict hierarchical or orthogonal representations. Input graphs must be provided in the <I>DOT language</I> format. <br>While efficient for its intended purpose, performance for extremely dense or massive graphs might require significant computational resources.


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
<b>twopi</b> primarily takes graph descriptions in the <I>DOT language</I> as input, which can be provided via standard input or a specified file. For output, it can generate a wide range of formats, including but not limited to, postscript (<I>ps</I>), portable document format (<I>pdf</I>), scalable vector graphics (<I>svg</I>), and various bitmap formats like <I>png</I> and <I>jpeg</I>. It can also output a DOT file with layout coordinates embedded, allowing further processing by other Graphviz tools or for inspection of the computed layout.


title: LAYOUT ALGORITHM PRINCIPLES
content:
The core of <b>twopi</b>'s algorithm involves positioning nodes on concentric circles. The placement is often determined by the distance of nodes from a designated 'root' node (or set of roots) in the graph, with nodes at similar distances placed on the same circle. This radial approach is highly effective for emphasizing centrality and relationships radiating outwards, making it suitable for tree-like structures, hub-and-spoke models, or network graphs where the notion of 'distance from center' is a meaningful aspect of the data.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>twopi</b> is one of the several specialized layout engines developed as part of the <I>Graphviz</I> (Graph Visualization Software) project, which originated at AT&T Labs Research. Graphviz itself emerged from pioneering research into graph drawing algorithms and has been under continuous development since the late 1990s. <br><br>The <I>twopi</I> algorithm was specifically designed to address the visualization challenges of graphs where a radial or concentric arrangement best illustrates relationships, often involving a central node or a set of highly connected 'hub' nodes. Its inclusion broadened the capabilities of Graphviz, providing a dedicated tool for radial layouts alongside other engines like <I>dot</I> (hierarchical), <I>neato</I> (force-directed), and <I>circo</I> (circular layouts), allowing users to choose the most appropriate layout style for their specific graph data.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--append, -a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite.<br><br><b>--ignore-interrupts, -i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignore interrupt signals (SIGINT).<br><br><b>--output-error=[MODE]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set behavior on write error. MODE can be <i>warn</i> (default), <i>warn-nopipe</i>, <i>exit</i>, <i>exit-nopipe</i>.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i><b>tee</b></i> command reads standard input and writes it to standard output as well as to one or more files, effectively duplicating its input.<br>It is commonly used in shell pipelines to capture intermediate data while allowing it to continue flowing through the pipeline.<br>This analysis assumes "tye" was a typographical error for "tee", as "tye" is not a standard or commonly recognized Linux command.


title: CAVEATS
content:
If no FILE is specified, <i><b>tee</b></i> writes only to standard output.<br>Be cautious with the default behavior of overwriting files. Always use <i><b>-a</b></i> to append if that's the desired outcome.<br>The command specified as "tye" is not a standard Linux utility. This analysis is based on the assumption that "tye" was a typo for "tee".


title: CLARIFICATION ON "TYE"
content:
The "tye" command is not a standard utility found in common Linux distributions. It is highly probable that "tye" was a typographical error for the widely used "tee" command, which serves to duplicate standard input to one or more files and standard output. If you intended to inquire about a different "tye" utility, please provide more context.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i><b>tee</b></i> command has been a standard part of Unix-like operating systems since early versions. Its name comes from the T-splitter fitting in plumbing, which splits a single stream into two (or more).<br>It's a fundamental utility often used in scripts and command-line operations for its simple yet powerful ability to both display output and save it to a file simultaneously.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all occurrences of <i>name</i>. For example, if <i>name</i> is both an alias and an executable in PATH, both will be shown. This is particularly useful when multiple versions of a command exist.<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress shell function lookup. This option is primarily for compatibility with other shells (like ksh) and might not significantly alter behavior in Bash as it always checks functions first.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force a PATH search for <i>name</i>, even if it's an alias, function, or built-in. If found, the full pathname of the executable is printed. If not found, nothing is printed and the exit status is non-zero.<br><br><b><b>-P</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Similar to <b>-p</b>, but restricts the output to only the first executable found in the PATH, regardless of whether it's an alias, function, or built-in. If found, the full pathname is printed.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output a single word describing the type of <i>name</i>: <i>alias</i>, <i>keyword</i>, <i>function</i>, <i>builtin</i>, or <i>file</i> (for an external executable). This is useful for programmatic use or scripting.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>type</b> command is a shell built-in used to describe how a command line argument (a 'command name') would be interpreted by the current shell. It reveals whether the name refers to an <i>alias</i>, a <i>shell function</i>, a <i>shell built-in command</i>, or an <i>external executable program</i> found in the system's PATH. This command is invaluable for debugging shell scripts, understanding command precedence, and ensuring that the correct version of a command is being invoked in a specific shell environment. Unlike tools like <b>which</b>, <b>type</b> provides a comprehensive view of the shell's command lookup order, including its internal mechanisms.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>type</b> command is a shell built-in, meaning its exact behavior and available options can vary slightly between different POSIX-compliant shells (e.g., Bash, Zsh, Ksh).<br>It reflects the command interpretation of the <i>current</i> shell environment and does not provide information about how a command might be interpreted in a different shell or user's environment.<br>The output format can differ significantly based on whether options like <b>-t</b>, <b>-p</b>, or <b>-a</b> are used.


title: COMMAND PRECEDENCE
content:
The <b>type</b> command is fundamental to understanding the shell's command precedence rules. When you type a command, the shell typically looks for it in the following order:<br>1. <i>Aliases</i><br>2. <i>Keywords</i> (like <b>if</b>, <b>for</b>, <b>while</b>)<br>3. <i>Functions</i><br>4. <i>Built-in commands</i> (like <b>cd</b>, <b>pwd</b>)<br>5. <i>External executables</i> found in the directories specified by the <b>PATH</b> environment variable.<br><b>type</b> helps reveal which of these categories a given command name falls into.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
The <b>type</b> command returns an exit status of <i>0</i> if all specified <i>name</i> arguments are found and recognized. It returns a non-zero status (typically <i>1</i>) if one or more <i>name</i> arguments are not found or recognized by the shell. This makes it suitable for use in conditional statements within shell scripts.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>type</b> command has been a standard feature in POSIX-compliant shells for a long time. Its inclusion is crucial for shell developers and users to understand the intricate command lookup mechanisms. It provides a programmatic way to query the shell's internal decision-making process when interpreting command names, making it an indispensable tool for shell scripting and debugging. Its design reflects the need to differentiate between various command sources (aliases, functions, built-ins, and external binaries) that can share the same name.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all possible interpretations of <i>COMMAND_NAME</i>, such as both an alias and an external executable, if they exist.<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress shell function lookup (primarily for Bash). This causes <b>type</b> to treat shell functions as if they were not defined.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If <i>COMMAND_NAME</i> would be executed as an external command, output its full pathname. The command exits with success (0) if found, and failure (non-zero) otherwise, suppressing any other output.<br><br><b><b>-P</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force a PATH search for <i>COMMAND_NAME</i>, even if it is an alias or shell function. This option is similar to <b>-p</b> but specifically ensures a PATH lookup.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output a single word indicating the type of <i>COMMAND_NAME</i>: <i>alias</i>, <i>keyword</i>, <i>function</i>, <i>builtin</i>, or <i>file</i>. No other information is displayed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>type</b> command is a shell built-in utility that describes how a command name would be interpreted if used as a command. It helps users understand whether a command is an alias, a shell function, a shell built-in, or an external program located in the system's PATH. This is particularly useful for debugging scripts, understanding command precedence, and ensuring the correct version of a command is being executed. <br><br>When invoked, <b>type</b> examines its arguments (command names) and outputs information about them. For example, it might tell you if 'ls' is an alias or a program, or if 'cd' is a built-in. This distinguishes it from commands like <b>which</b> or <b>whereis</b> which primarily locate external executables.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command 'typeinc' is not a standard Linux command or utility. It is highly probable that 'type' was intended. The information provided here pertains to the <b>type</b> shell built-in command. <br><br>As a shell built-in, <b>type</b> is part of the shell itself (e.g., Bash, Zsh, Ksh) and does not exist as a separate executable file in the file system. Its behavior can slightly vary between different shell implementations.


title: RETURN VALUE
content:
The <b>type</b> command returns a status of 0 if all specified <i>COMMAND_NAME</i>s are found and interpreted, and a non-zero status if any <i>COMMAND_NAME</i> is not found or cannot be interpreted as a command.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>type</b> command has been a fundamental part of Unix-like shells, including the Bourne shell (sh), and later expanded upon in more modern shells like Bash, Zsh, and Ksh. It is defined in the POSIX standard as a way for users and scripts to reliably determine how a command name is interpreted by the shell, a critical aspect of command execution and shell scripting.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>typeorm</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>options</i>]<br><br>Where <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> is one of the available TypeORM CLI commands, and [<i>options</i>] are command-specific flags.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>migration:run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes all pending database migrations.<br><br><b><b>migration:generate</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a new migration file based on the difference between the current entities and the database schema.<br><br><b><b>migration:revert</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverts the last executed migration.<br><br><b><b>migration:show</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all executed and pending migrations.<br><br><b><b>entity:create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new entity file with a specified name.<br><br><b><b>subscriber:create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new subscriber file for database events.<br><br><b><b>schema:sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronizes the database schema with defined entities. <I>Use with caution, as it can cause data loss.</I><br><br><b><b>schema:drop</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Drops the database schema. <I>Extremely destructive; use only for development or testing.</I><br><br><b><b>query</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a raw SQL query directly on the database.<br><br><b><b>version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the installed TypeORM version.<br><br><b><b>init</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes a new TypeORM project with basic configuration.<br><br><b><b>cache:clear</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Clears the TypeORM query cache.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>typeorm</B> command-line interface (CLI) is an essential tool for developers working with <B>TypeORM</B>, a powerful Object-Relational Mapper (ORM) for <I>TypeScript</I> and <I>JavaScript</I>. It simplifies common database operations, enabling developers to manage their application's data layer efficiently. Key functionalities include generating and running database migrations to evolve schema changes over time, creating new entity and subscriber files, and synchronizing the database schema with defined entities. It also provides utilities for executing raw SQL queries and managing the query cache. By abstracting complex database interactions, the <B>typeorm</B> CLI allows developers to focus on application logic, ensuring data consistency and simplifying collaborative development on database-driven projects. It integrates seamlessly into Node.js workflows, typically used within project directories configured with <B>TypeORM</B> settings.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <B>typeorm</B> command is not a native Linux utility; it requires <B>Node.js</B> and <B>npm</B>/<B>yarn</B> to be installed. It typically operates within a Node.js project directory that has <B>TypeORM</B> configured, usually via an <I>ormconfig.json</I> file or <I>datasource.ts</I> module. Commands like <B>schema:sync</B> and <B>schema:drop</B> can lead to irreversible data loss if not used carefully, especially in production environments. Ensure proper backups and environment-specific configurations.


title: <B>INSTALLATION</B>
content:
The <B>typeorm</B> CLI is installed via <B>npm</B> or <B>yarn</B>. It can be installed globally (<I>npm install -g typeorm</I>) for general use or as a development dependency within a project (<I>npm install --save-dev typeorm</I>), typically invoked using <B>npx typeorm</B> or a script in <I>package.json</I>.


title: <B>CONFIGURATION</B>
content:
The CLI relies on a configuration file, typically named <I>ormconfig.json</I>, <I>ormconfig.js</I>, <I>ormconfig.ts</I>, or a <I>datasource.ts</I> file. This file specifies database connection details, entity paths, migration paths, and other TypeORM settings. The <B>--config</B> and <B>--connection</B> options can be used to override default configuration files or specified connections.


title: HISTORY
content:
TypeORM emerged as a prominent Object-Relational Mapper (ORM) in the <I>Node.js</I> ecosystem, gaining significant traction due to its strong support for <B>TypeScript</B> and modern JavaScript features. Developed as an open-source project, it quickly became a preferred choice for building robust and scalable data-driven applications. The <B>typeorm</B> CLI was developed to streamline the development workflow, automating repetitive database tasks such as schema management and migration generation, which are crucial for maintaining database integrity across various development stages and team collaborations. Its continuous development reflects evolving best practices in ORM and database management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>typeset</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>name</i>[=<i>value</i>] ...]<br><b>typeset</b> <b>-f</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>name</i> ...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Declare an indexed array variable.<br><br><b><b>-A</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Declare an associative array variable (Bash 4+).<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate on function names. When used alone, it lists function definitions. With arguments, it sets attributes for those functions.<br><br><b><b>-g</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create global variables when used within a shell function (Bash only).<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treat the variable as an integer. Arithmetic evaluation is performed during assignment.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert all characters to lowercase upon assignment to the variable.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a nameref, a reference to another variable (Bash 4.3+, ksh93).<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display attributes and values in a reusable format suitable for re-evaluation by the shell.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mark variables as read-only. Their values cannot be changed after initial assignment.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the 'trace' attribute for functions (Bash debugging). In <i>ksh</i>, it sets a 'tag' attribute for variables.<br><br><b><b>-u</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert all characters to uppercase upon assignment to the variable.<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mark variables for export to the environment of child processes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>typeset</i> is a powerful shell built-in command, primarily found in KornShell (<i>ksh</i>) and as an alias for <i>declare</i> in Bash. It allows users to declare shell variables and functions, assign values, and set various attributes for them. These attributes can control aspects like variable scope, integer properties, read-only status, exportability, and case conversion. For instance, it can declare an integer variable, an array, or export a variable to the environment. When used without options, <i>typeset</i> lists the names and attributes of all shell variables and functions. It is a fundamental tool for managing variables and functions within shell scripts and interactive shell sessions, offering more granular control than simple assignment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>typeset</i> is a shell built-in command, not an external executable. Its behavior can vary slightly between shells (e.g., <i>bash</i>, <i>ksh</i>, <i>zsh</i>).<br>In Bash, <i>typeset</i> is exactly equivalent to <i>declare</i>. Using <i>declare</i> is generally preferred for clarity and consistency in Bash scripts.<br>The meaning of the <b>-t</b> option differs between <i>ksh</i> (tag variable) and <i>bash</i> (trace function).


title: BUILT-IN STATUS
content:
<i>typeset</i> is a shell built-in command, meaning it is executed directly by the shell and not as an external program. This makes it faster and allows it to directly manipulate the shell's internal state, such as environment variables and function definitions.


title: VARIABLE SCOPING (BASH SPECIFIC)
content:
In Bash, <i>declare</i> (and thus <i>typeset</i>) used without options inside a function typically declares a local variable by default, overriding a global variable of the same name. To explicitly declare or modify a global variable from within a function in Bash, the <b>-g</b> option must be used.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>typeset</i> command originated in the KornShell (<i>ksh</i>) as a powerful mechanism for defining variable attributes and types, offering more robust variable management capabilities beyond simple string assignments. When Bash was developed, it adopted a similar functionality, but named its built-in <i>declare</i>. For compatibility with <i>ksh</i> scripts, Bash also includes <i>typeset</i> as an alias that behaves identically to <i>declare</i>. Its usage is deeply rooted in shell scripting for controlling variable behavior.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
typst <I>command</I> [OPTIONS] <I>arguments...</I><br>Example: typst compile <I>input.typ</I> [<I>output.pdf</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>compile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>command</I><br>Compiles a Typst file (<I>.typ</I>) into an output format (e.g., PDF).<br><br><b>watch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>command</I><br>Monitors a Typst file for changes and recompiles automatically for live preview.<br><br><b>query</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>command</I><br>Extracts structured information or specific elements from a Typst document.<br><br><b>fonts</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>command</I><br>Manages Typst's font cache, allowing listing, adding, or clearing fonts.<br><br><b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>command</I><br>Initializes a new Typst project with a basic template.<br><br><b>-o, --output <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file path for compiled documents.<br><br><b>--root <DIR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the root directory for resolving file paths and imports within a document.<br><br><b>--font-path <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a custom directory to the font search paths for Typst.<br><br><b>--input <KEY=VALUE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes a string key-value pair as an input variable to the document's compilation.<br><br><b>--format <FORMAT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines the output format (e.g., <I>pdf</I>, <I>png</I>, <I>svg</I>) when compiling.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Typst is a new, powerful, and easy-to-learn markup language designed for typesetting. It aims to be a modern alternative to traditional systems like LaTeX, offering high-quality typography while significantly improving compilation speed and user experience. Written in Rust, Typst compiles documents much faster than LaTeX, often in milliseconds. It provides a concise and intuitive syntax for creating a wide range of documents, from scientific papers and books to presentations and letters. Key features include integrated scripting capabilities, robust math typesetting, figure and table support, and direct PDF output. Its focus on user-friendliness and performance makes it an appealing choice for both beginners and experienced document creators.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As a relatively new system, Typst's ecosystem and tooling are still developing compared to more mature alternatives like LaTeX. Not all LaTeX packages have direct Typst equivalents yet, which might require custom implementations for specific functionalities. While generally faster, very large or complex documents can still be resource-intensive.


title: KEY FEATURES
content:
Typst offers integrated scripting capabilities, robust math typesetting, and a modular design. It supports custom styling, bibliography management, and cross-referencing, making it versatile for various document types.


title: PERFORMANCE FOCUS
content:
Leverages the Rust programming language for extremely fast compilation times, often measured in milliseconds. This rapid feedback loop makes Typst ideal for rapid iteration and managing large, complex projects efficiently.


title: INTUITIVE SYNTAX
content:
Utilizes a clean and intuitive markup syntax that blends elements of Markdown with powerful, function-based programming constructs. This design makes it easier to learn and write documents compared to traditional typesetting systems.


title: HISTORY
content:
Typst was first publicly released in 2023 by two ETH Zurich students, Lars Bergstrom and Yannis Günther, with the goal of creating a modern, fast, and user-friendly alternative to LaTeX. It quickly gained traction due to its performance, clean syntax, and powerful capabilities. Developed in Rust, it emphasizes speed and reliability. Its development is ongoing, with a strong community contributing to its rapid evolution and the expansion of its core features and package ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>FILE</I>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies one or more input files to be converted. If no files are specified, <B>u2d</B> reads from standard input and writes to standard output.<br><br><b>-k, --keepdate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keeps the original modification date of the converted file. Without this option, the file's modification date will be updated to the time of conversion.<br><br><b>-o, --oldfile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;This is the default behavior. It converts the file in place, overwriting the original file with the converted content.<br><br><b>-n, --newfile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the input file(s) and writes the output to new file(s). This option requires pairs of input and output filenames (<I>INFILE</I> <I>OUTFILE</I>).<br><br><b>-s, --safe</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips conversion of files that appear to be binary files. This prevents accidental corruption of non-textual data.<br><br><b>-F, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces conversion even if the file appears to be binary. Use with caution, as this can corrupt non-text files.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all warning messages and informational output.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints detailed information during the conversion process, such as the names of files being processed.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with usage instructions and exits.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs version information about the <B>u2d</B> utility and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>u2d</B> (Unix to DOS) command is a utility primarily used to convert text files that utilize Unix-style line endings (represented by a single newline character, <I>\n</I>) to DOS/Windows-style line endings (which consist of a carriage return followed by a newline character, <I>\r\n</I>). This conversion is essential when transferring text files between Unix-like operating systems (Linux, macOS, BSD) and Windows, as incompatible line endings can lead to display issues in text editors, incorrect parsing by scripts, or malfunctions in applications.<br><br>While <B>u2d</B> itself might often be a custom script, an alias, or a symbolic link, its core functionality mirrors that of the more widely recognized <B>unix2dos</B> command. It operates by scanning the input file, identifying each instance of a Unix newline character, and then inserting a carriage return character immediately before it. This process makes the file compatible with applications and systems that expect the CRLF line ending convention.<br><br>This command is particularly valuable in cross-platform development environments, during data migration, or when sharing plain text data where line ending consistency is critical for proper interpretation and display.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <B>u2d</B> command is not a standard utility across all Linux distributions and may not be installed by default. Its availability, exact behavior, and available options can vary significantly. Users might find it implemented as a custom shell script, an alias, or a symbolic link to the more common <B>unix2dos</B> command.<br><br>Using <B>u2d</B> (or any line ending conversion tool) on binary files will almost certainly corrupt them. Always ensure you are converting plain text files. If unsure, use the <I>-s</I> (safe) option if available, or back up files before performing any in-place conversions.


title: CONVERSION LOGIC
content:
The fundamental operation of <B>u2d</B> involves iterating through the input file's content and, for every Unix-style newline character (<I>\n</I>) encountered, prepending it with a carriage return character (<I>\r</I>). This transforms <I>LF</I> into <I>CRLF</I>, making the file correctly formatted for DOS/Windows applications.


title: STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT USAGE
content:
Like many Unix utilities, if no specific input <I>FILE</I> is provided, <B>u2d</B> typically reads from standard input (<I>stdin</I>) and writes the converted content to standard output (<I>stdout</I>). This allows it to be effectively used within command pipelines. For instance, to convert a file from <I>stdin</I> and redirect its output to a new file: <I>cat unix_file.txt | u2d > dos_file.txt</I>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The need for line ending conversion utilities like <B>u2d</B> arose from the early divergence in operating system conventions. Unix-like systems adopted the single Line Feed (<I>\n</I>) character to denote a new line, while DOS and later Windows systems opted for a Carriage Return followed by a Line Feed (<I>\r\n</I>). This difference often led to files created on one system appearing as a single long line or with extra characters when opened on another.<br><br>To bridge this incompatibility, utilities were developed to convert between these formats. While <B>u2d</B> itself might be a more recent or custom wrapper, the underlying functionality, embodied by commands like <B>unix2dos</B>, has been a staple in cross-platform computing for decades. These tools ensure seamless file exchange and compatibility, making them indispensable for developers and users working in mixed-OS environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
Due to `u3d` being a non-standard command, a <b>general synopsis cannot be provided</b>. If `u3d` exists on your system, its synopsis would be defined by its specific script or executable. For a custom script, a typical invocation might look like:<br><br><i>`u3d [options] [arguments]`</i><br><br>To determine the actual synopsis, one would need to inspect the script itself or its documentation.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>No standard parameters</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;As a non-standard command, `u3d` does not have universally defined parameters. Any options or arguments would be specific to its local implementation or custom script. For example, if it were a custom script for a specific task, parameters might include input file paths, output directories, or specific operational flags determined by the script's creator.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `u3d` command is <b>not a standard or commonly pre-installed utility</b> in most Linux distributions. Unlike commands such as `ls` or `grep`, `u3d` does not have a universally defined purpose or set of functionalities.<br><br>It is highly probable that `u3d` refers to one of the following:<br><i>- A custom script or alias</i> created by a user or system administrator for a specific local task.<br><i>- A component or executable</i> from a third-party application that uses `u3d` as its command-line interface, possibly related to 'Unity 3D' development environments (though the primary executable is usually `Unity` or `UnityEditor`).<br><i>- A typo</i> for another command (e.g., `udisksctl`).<br><br>Without specific context, its exact behavior, options, and arguments are <b>undefined and dependent</b> on its local implementation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Non-standard Nature</b>: `u3d` is not part of standard Linux utilities, meaning its presence and behavior vary widely by system.<br><b>No Guarantees</b>: There are no guarantees about its functionality, security, or stability without knowing its source.<br><b>Potential Conflicts</b>: A custom `u3d` might conflict with future standard commands or other custom scripts if not carefully named.<br><b>System Dependent</b>: Its existence and purpose are entirely dependent on how it was installed or configured on a specific Linux system.


title: CHECK LOCAL INSTALLATION
content:
To determine if `u3d` exists on your system and what it does, you can use `<b>which u3d</b>` to find its path. If found, inspecting its content (if it's a script) or consulting local documentation would be necessary to understand its purpose and usage.


title: CONTEXT IS KEY
content:
The functionality of `u3d` is <b>entirely context-dependent</b>. If you encountered `u3d` in a specific project or environment, that context is crucial for understanding its intended use.


title: HISTORY
content:
As `u3d` is not a standard Linux command, it <b>does not possess a documented history</b> of development or widespread usage within the Linux community. Any 'history' for a local `u3d` command would be specific to its creation and evolution on the system where it exists.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ubuntu-drivers</b> [<i>--gpgpu</i>] {<i>autoinstall</i> | <i>devices</i> | <i>list</i> | <i>install</i> <<i>driver-package</i>> | <i>purge</i> | <i>add-ppa</i> | <i>status</i>} [<i>options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>autoinstall</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically installs the recommended proprietary drivers for detected hardware.<br><br><b>devices | list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists detected hardware and the available proprietary drivers, indicating which are recommended.<br><br><b>install <<i>driver-package</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs a specific proprietary driver package by name (e.g., <i>nvidia-driver-470</i>).<br><br><b>purge</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes all proprietary drivers previously installed by <b>ubuntu-drivers</b>.<br><br><b>add-ppa</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a PPA (Personal Package Archive) for more recent or experimental drivers, often used for newer NVIDIA releases.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the status of installed proprietary drivers.<br><br><b>--gpgpu</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters output to show only drivers relevant to GPGPU (General-Purpose computing on Graphics Processing Units). This is a global option for the command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>ubuntu-drivers</b> is a command-line utility in Ubuntu that simplifies the management and installation of proprietary hardware drivers. It is particularly useful for graphics cards (NVIDIA, AMD), but can also assist with other hardware requiring specific drivers, such as Wi-Fi adapters.<br><br>The tool helps users identify suitable drivers for their system's hardware and provides mechanisms to install or remove them. It acts as an abstraction layer over <b>apt</b> and <b>dkms</b>, making the process of installing third-party drivers much more user-friendly, especially for those unfamiliar with manual driver compilation or package management. It ensures that the correct kernel modules are built and integrated into the system, often recommending stable and tested versions. This command is an essential part of Ubuntu's effort to provide a smooth user experience even with closed-source hardware components, allowing users to leverage full hardware capabilities without deep technical knowledge.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>&bull;</b></i> Requires an active internet connection to download drivers.<br><i><b>&bull;</b></i> A system reboot is often required after driver installation for changes to take effect.<br><i><b>&bull;</b></i> Can potentially conflict with manually installed drivers or other driver management tools.<br><i><b>&bull;</b></i> Primarily focuses on proprietary drivers; open-source drivers are generally managed directly by the kernel or standard package updates.<br><i><b>&bull;</b></i> Using the <i>add-ppa</i> command should be done with caution, as PPAs can sometimes introduce instability if not well-maintained.


title: GUI EQUIVALENT
content:
The <b>ubuntu-drivers</b> command-line tool powers the 'Additional Drivers' section found in Ubuntu's graphical environment (typically under 'Software & Updates' or 'Drivers'). This offers a user-friendly graphical interface for those who prefer not to use the terminal.


title: DRIVER RECOMMENDATIONS
content:
When using <b>ubuntu-drivers devices</b> or <b>autoinstall</b>, the tool often suggests a 'recommended' driver. This recommendation is based on a balance of stability, performance, and compatibility, making it the safest and most reliable choice for most users.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>ubuntu-drivers</b> emerged as part of Ubuntu's ongoing effort to simplify hardware support, particularly for graphics cards, which have historically been a common pain point for Linux users due to proprietary binary blobs. It was developed to streamline the process of identifying, installing, and managing these drivers, effectively superseding or complementing earlier, more manual methods. Its introduction reflects Ubuntu's commitment to user-friendliness and out-of-the-box hardware compatibility, especially for NVIDIA and AMD GPUs where performance and features often depend on closed-source drivers. The command-line tool also powers the 'Additional Drivers' graphical utility, providing a consistent backend for driver management.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message for the command and exits.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about the security status.<br><br><b>-s, --status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a concise summary of the system's overall security status.<br><br><b>--esm-apps</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays specific details related to the <i>Extended Security Maintenance (ESM)</i> for applications.<br><br><b>--esm-infra</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays specific details related to the <i>Extended Security Maintenance (ESM)</i> for infrastructure.<br><br><b>--pro</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows comprehensive details about the <i>Ubuntu Pro</i> subscription status and its activated services.<br><br><b>--livepatch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides information about the Canonical Livepatch service, including its status and applied patches.<br><br><b>--notifications</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays security-related notifications, such as pending updates or required reboots.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `ubuntu-security-status` command provides a comprehensive overview of the security posture of an Ubuntu system. It is designed to inform users about the state of their system's security updates, particularly concerning Canonical's <i>Extended Security Maintenance (ESM)</i> for both infrastructure (ESM Infra) and applications (ESM Apps). The command details the activation status of <i>Ubuntu Pro</i>, which includes ESM services, and indicates whether kernel Livepatching is enabled and active. Furthermore, it highlights pending security updates, outstanding reboots, and other critical security-related notifications. By consolidating this information, `ubuntu-security-status` helps users and administrators quickly assess if their system is receiving vital security patches and adheres to recommended security practices, ensuring a more secure and up-to-date operating environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command is exclusive to Ubuntu operating systems and relies on the `ubuntu-advantage-tools` package being installed. The accuracy of the reported security status depends on the system's ability to connect to Canonical's update servers and the current state of its `apt` package information. While the command itself can be run by a standard user, some underlying update actions suggested by its output (e.g., `apt update` or `apt upgrade`) require root privileges.


title: UNDERSTANDING ESM AND UBUNTU PRO
content:
<i>ESM (Extended Security Maintenance)</i> provides security updates for high and critical CVEs for Ubuntu LTS releases beyond their standard five-year support period. <i>Ubuntu Pro</i> is a subscription that includes ESM (for both Infra and Apps), kernel Livepatch, FIPS, and other compliance and security tools. The `ubuntu-security-status` command is instrumental in verifying the active status of these services on your system.


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
Running `<b>ubuntu-security-status</b>` without any options provides a summary of all relevant security information.<br>To check only the Ubuntu Pro subscription status, use `<b>ubuntu-security-status --pro</b>`.<br>To see only pending security notifications, use `<b>ubuntu-security-status --notifications</b>`.


title: HISTORY
content:
The `ubuntu-security-status` command emerged as part of Canonical's efforts to enhance system security management and promote <i>Extended Security Maintenance (ESM)</i> for Ubuntu users. It is closely tied to the `ubuntu-advantage-tools` package (now often referred to as `ua-client` or `pro`), which provides access to <i>Ubuntu Pro</i> services, including ESM. Its development reflects Ubuntu's commitment to providing clear visibility into a system's security posture, especially for users utilizing paid or complimentary ESM services for older LTS releases. The command acts as a convenient aggregator, simplifying the process of checking security-critical information that previously might have required inspecting multiple sources or running several distinct commands.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;socket&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the <i>ubus</i> socket file, defaulting to <i>/var/run/ubus.sock</i>.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>&lt;timeout&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in milliseconds for <i>ubus</i> calls.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about operations.<br><br><b><b>-m</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitors raw <i>ubus</i> messages, useful for low-level debugging of the bus traffic.<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs JSON in a simple, non-prettified format (single line) rather than a human-readable one.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists <i>ubus</i> objects and their methods in a tree-like, hierarchical format.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ubus</i> is the user-space message bus system developed specifically for OpenWrt, an embedded Linux distribution. It provides a lightweight and efficient mechanism for inter-process communication (IPC) between various system services and applications running on embedded devices. Unlike heavier IPC systems like D-Bus, <i>ubus</i> is designed with minimal resource consumption in mind, making it ideal for devices with limited memory and processing power. It allows programs to register objects with methods, which other programs can then call. It also supports event broadcasting, enabling applications to subscribe to and react to system events. This centralized communication enables modularity and simplifies system management in OpenWrt environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ubus</i> is primarily used in OpenWrt and is not a standard component of general-purpose Linux distributions. It requires the <i>ubusd</i> daemon to be running for its operations. The specific API (objects and methods) exposed via <i>ubus</i> can vary significantly between different OpenWrt versions, and internal methods may not have guaranteed stability. Error messages can sometimes be terse or cryptic, requiring deeper understanding of the underlying OpenWrt system.


title: COMMON SUBCOMMANDS
content:
The <i>ubus</i> utility operates primarily through various subcommands, each performing a specific action on the message bus:<br><br><b>call</b> <i>&lt;object&gt; &lt;method&gt; [&lt;json-string&gt;]</i>: Invokes a specific method on a registered <i>ubus</i> object. This is the primary way to interact with OpenWrt services, often passing JSON data as arguments.<br><br><b>listen</b> <i>[&lt;event&gt; ...]</i>: Subscribes to and displays <i>ubus</i> events as they occur. It's invaluable for real-time monitoring and debugging system changes.<br><br><b>send</b> <i>&lt;event&gt; &lt;json-string&gt;</i>: Publishes a custom event to the <i>ubus</i>, optionally including JSON data. Useful for inter-application communication and custom scripting.<br><br><b>monitor</b>: Provides a low-level, continuous view of all <i>ubus</i> traffic, including method calls, return values, and broadcasted events. Essential for deep debugging of bus interactions.<br><br><b>list</b> <i>[&lt;object&gt;]</i>: Lists all available <i>ubus</i> objects and their exposed methods. Specifying an <i>&lt;object&gt;</i> filters the list to show methods for that specific object. This command helps in discovering available APIs.<br><br><b>wait_for</b> <i>&lt;object&gt; [&lt;object&gt; ...]</i>: Blocks execution until one or more specified <i>ubus</i> objects become available on the bus. This is particularly useful in startup scripts to ensure dependencies are met before proceeding.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ubus</i> was developed as a core component of OpenWrt, designed to provide a lightweight and efficient inter-process communication mechanism tailored for resource-constrained embedded devices, specifically to address the perceived overhead of D-Bus in such environments. It became central to OpenWrt's system architecture, allowing various daemons (such as <i>netifd</i> for network configuration, <i>rpcd</i> for RPC calls, and <i>hostapd</i> for Wi-Fi management) to communicate and expose their functionalities in a standardized way. Its development closely tracks OpenWrt's evolution, becoming an indispensable and stable part of the OpenWrt ecosystem since its introduction.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>ucfq</b> does not appear to be a standard or commonly recognized utility within the Linux operating system. It is possible that this command is a typo, a custom script specific to a particular environment, or a non-existent placeholder. Without further context or definition, its functionality, purpose, and usage cannot be described as it is not part of any official Linux distribution's core utilities or widely adopted packages. Therefore, any attempt to execute it on a typical Linux system would likely result in a 'command not found' error.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As <b>ucfq</b> is not a standard command, attempting to execute it would most likely result in a 'command not found' error message from your shell. Users should verify command names and ensure they are using standard or properly installed utilities before attempting execution.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no known history or development record for a standard Linux command named <b>ucfq</b>, as it does not exist in common distributions' documentation or core utility sets. It is not part of GNU Core Utilities, BusyBox, or other widely used command collections.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>package</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the Debian package that owns the configuration file being managed.<br><br><b><I>config-file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The full path to the configuration file that <I>ucf</I> is managing.<br><br><b><I>original-file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Optional) The full path to the original, unmodified version of the configuration file supplied by the package. This is used by <I>ucf</I> for comparison with the current file.<br><br><b><I>install-dir</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Optional) The directory where the configuration file is installed or where <I>ucf</I> should look for it. This can influence how paths are resolved internally.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>ucfr</I> (update-config-files-refreshed) command is a specialized helper script for <I>ucf</I> (Update Config Files), a utility predominantly used in Debian-based Linux distributions for managing configuration files during package installations and upgrades. Its primary function is to refresh <I>ucf</I>'s internal database concerning configuration files. When a package utilizes <I>ucf</I> to handle its configuration files, <I>ucfr</I> ensures that <I>ucf</I> is aware of the current state and versions of these files, especially after a package has been upgraded or reinstalled. This mechanism enables <I>ucf</I> to accurately manage conflicts between user-modified configurations and new package-supplied versions, prompting the user for appropriate actions (e.g., install new, keep old, merge) when conflicts arise. <I>ucfr</I> is typically invoked by package maintainer scripts automatically rather than being run directly by end-users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
ucfr is not designed for direct end-user invocation. It is an internal script primarily called by package maintainer scripts as part of the <I>ucf</I> utility suite. Its functionality is deeply integrated with <I>ucf</I>'s database management.


title: INTERNAL OPERATION
content:
<I>ucfr</I> is an internal script primarily used by the <I>ucf</I> utility itself or by package maintainer scripts during package installations and upgrades. It helps <I>ucf</I> keep track of the state and versions of configuration files it manages, which is crucial for proper conflict resolution and decision-making during subsequent package operations.


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
Unlike most Linux commands, <I>ucfr</I> is rarely invoked directly by an end-user from the command line. Its function is to update <I>ucf</I>'s internal database regarding configuration files, typically after a package has been installed, upgraded, or purged, ensuring the integrity and accuracy of the configuration management system.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>ucf</I>, and subsequently <I>ucfr</I>, were developed within the Debian project to provide a robust and standardized method for handling configuration file updates during package upgrades. Prior to <I>ucf</I>, managing conflicts between user-modified configuration files and new package versions could be inconsistent, often leading to files being overwritten or requiring manual intervention. <I>ucf</I> aimed to streamline this process, allowing maintainers to define how their configuration files should be managed and prompting users for decisions (e.g., keep old, install new, merge) when conflicts arise. <I>ucfr</I> specifically emerged as a component to update <I>ucf</I>'s internal state regarding the 'freshness' or status of configuration files, ensuring <I>ucf</I> operates with the most current information. Its development is integral to the evolution of Debian's package management practices, contributing to better user experience and system stability.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>show</b> [<I>config[.section[.option]]</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current configuration, or a specific part of it, in a human-readable format.<br><br><b><b>get</b> <I>config[.section[.option]]</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves the value of a specific configuration option and prints it to standard output.<br><br><b><b>set</b> <I>config.section.option</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the value of a configuration option. This change is staged and not immediately written to disk.<br><br><b><b>add</b> <I>config.section</I>=<I>type</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new unnamed section of a specified type to a configuration file. Returns its generated reference.<br><br><b><b>add_list</b> <I>config.section.option</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new value to a list type option, appending it to the existing values. Use for options that can hold multiple entries.<br><br><b><b>del_list</b> <I>config.section.option</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes a specific value from a list type option.<br><br><b><b>delete</b> <I>config[.section[.option]]</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a configuration option, an entire section, or even a whole configuration file. This change is staged.<br><br><b><b>rename</b> <I>config.section</I>=<I>name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Renames an unnamed (anonymous) section to a named section, or renames an existing named section.<br><br><b><b>commit</b> [<I>config</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves all pending (uncommitted) changes to the configuration files on disk. If a specific config is given, only changes for that config are saved.<br><br><b><b>revert</b> [<I>config</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Discards all pending (uncommitted) changes, reverting to the last committed state for the specified config or all configs.<br><br><b><b>export</b> [<I>config</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports the configuration in a more verbose, scriptable format to standard output. Useful for backup or transfer.<br><br><b><b>import</b> [<I>config</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Imports configuration data from standard input, typically from an exported UCI format. Changes are staged.<br><br><b><b>changes</b> [<I>config</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a summary of all pending, uncommitted changes for a specific configuration or all configurations.<br><br><b><b>batch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enters an interactive batch mode, allowing multiple UCI commands to be executed sequentially, useful for complex operations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>uci</b> (Universal Configuration Interface) command is the primary tool for managing system configurations on <I>OpenWrt</I> and similar embedded Linux distributions.<br>It provides a centralized, consistent, and scriptable way to interact with configuration files, typically located in <I>/etc/config/</I>.<br>UCI simplifies complex configuration tasks by abstracting the underlying file structure, allowing users and scripts to easily read, modify, and commit changes for various services like networking, wireless, firewall, and more.<br>Changes made with <I>uci</I> are stored in a staging area and must be explicitly committed to become permanent on disk, and often require a service restart to take effect.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>uci</b> command is specific to <I>OpenWrt</I> and other embedded Linux distributions that utilize the UCI system.<br>It is generally not found on standard desktop or server Linux distributions like Debian, Ubuntu, or Fedora.<br>Remember that changes made with <I>uci set</I>, <I>add</I>, <I>delete</I> etc., are only temporary until <I>uci commit</I> is explicitly executed to write them to disk.<br>After committing changes, a relevant service often needs to be reloaded or restarted (e.g., <I>/etc/init.d/network reload</I>, <I>wifi reload</I>, or <I>service firewall restart</I>) for the new configuration to take effect in the running system.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE LOCATION
content:
UCI configuration files are typically found in the <I>/etc/config/</I> directory.<br>Each file usually corresponds to a major service or component (e.g., <I>/etc/config/network</I>, <I>/etc/config/wireless</I>, <I>/etc/config/firewall</I>).<br>The file format is simple, human-readable, and designed for easy parsing by the UCI system, consisting of sections and options.


title: APPLYING CHANGES
content:
After using <I>uci commit</I> to save changes to disk, it's almost always necessary to reload or restart the affected service for the new configuration to become active in the running system.<br>For example, after modifying network settings, one might use <I>/etc/init.d/network reload</I> or <I>wifi reload</I> to apply them.<br>Without a service restart, the running system may continue to use its old configuration.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>uci</b> system was developed specifically for the <I>OpenWrt</I> project to provide a unified, command-line interface for managing the router's configuration.<br>It emerged from the need for a simple, yet powerful, configuration mechanism suitable for resource-constrained embedded devices, making it easy for both users and scripts to interact with settings without directly editing diverse and often complex configuration files from various services.<br>Its design focuses on consistency and atomicity of changes, ensuring configurations remain stable even across multiple modifications, a significant improvement over manual file editing.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
ubus(8), sysctl(8), ip(8), service(8), init(8) - (for service control scripts often used after UCI commit), config(5) - (refers to configuration files in general, not a command)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>TARGET_ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The desired character encoding for the output. This is a mandatory argument, not a flag. Examples include <I>latin1</I>, <I>utf8</I>, <I>koi8-r</I>, etc.<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the conversion even if there are ambiguities or unrepresentable characters, potentially leading to data loss or substitution.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about the conversion process, including statistics and any warnings.<br><br><b>-i, --info, -l, --list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all supported character encodings and conversion methods available to <I>recode</I> (and thus <I>ucs2any</I>).<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>ucs2any</I> is a utility, often a symbolic link to the more general <I>recode</I> command, specifically designed for converting text files encoded in UCS-2 (Unicode Basic Multilingual Plane) to other desired character encodings. It simplifies the process by implicitly setting the input encoding to UCS-2, requiring the user only to specify the target encoding. This command is particularly useful for handling older Unicode files or data streams that might be in the fixed-width UCS-2 format and need to be transformed for compatibility with modern systems, which often use UTF-8 or other locale-specific encodings. It can process files provided as arguments or read from standard input, writing the converted output to standard output.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>ucs2any</I> is typically a specialized invocation of the <I>recode</I> command. Its capabilities and supported encodings are inherited from <I>recode</I>.<br><br>UCS-2 only covers the Basic Multilingual Plane (BMP) of Unicode (U+0000 to U+FFFF). Characters outside the BMP (Supplementary Planes) are not representable in pure UCS-2 and cannot be correctly converted if the source data claims to be UCS-2 but contains such characters. In such cases, the source might actually be UTF-16.<br><br>Conversion to character sets that cannot represent all characters present in the UCS-2 input may result in character loss or replacement with a substitute character (e.g., '?').


title: IMPLICIT SOURCE ENCODING
content:
When invoked as <I>ucs2any</I>, the command automatically assumes the input character encoding is UCS-2. This simplifies the command line as you do not need to explicitly specify <I>ucs2</I> as the source.


title: STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
If no <I>FILE</I> arguments are provided, <I>ucs2any</I> reads from standard input (<I>stdin</I>) and writes the converted output to standard output (<I>stdout</I>). This allows for piping data from other commands or for interactive conversion.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>recode</I> project, which includes <I>ucs2any</I>, has been a long-standing utility in the Unix/Linux ecosystem for character set conversion. It was developed to address the complexities of managing various character encodings, especially in the pre-UTF-8 dominant era. <I>ucs2any</I> specifically caters to the need for converting UCS-2, an older fixed-width Unicode encoding, to more modern or locale-specific encodings. While <I>iconv</I> has become the more prevalent and standard tool for encoding conversion in many contemporary systems, <I>recode</I> and its symlinks like <I>ucs2any</I> still exist and are used in environments where they are preferred or already integrated.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>udevadm</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>COMMAND_OPTIONS</i>] [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>]<br><br>Common commands include:<br><b>udevadm control</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>COMMAND</i><br><b>udevadm info</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] {<i>DEVICE</i> | <i>FILE</i> | <i>PATH</i>}<br><b>udevadm monitor</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><b>udevadm trigger</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><b>udevadm settle</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><b>udevadm test</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] {<i>DEVICE_PATH</i> | <i>SYSFS_PATH</i>}<br><b>udevadm hwdb</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>COMMAND</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--debug</b>, <b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print debug messages to the console for detailed output.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the version number of the <i>udevadm</i> utility.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message for <i>udevadm</i> or a specific subcommand.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--query=<i>TYPE</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>info</i> subcommand) Query specified device properties of a given <i>TYPE</i> (e.g., <i>name</i>, <i>path</i>, <i>all</i>).<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--attribute-walk</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>info</i> subcommand) Query attributes of the specified device and all its parent devices in <i>sysfs</i>.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--path=<i>SYSFS_PATH</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>info</i> subcommand) Specify a device by its <i>sysfs</i> path (e.g., <i>/sys/class/block/sda</i>).<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--name=<i>DEV_NAME</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>info</i> subcommand) Specify a device by its device node name (e.g., <i>sda</i>).<br><br><b><b>--log-priority=<i>LEVEL</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>control</i> subcommand) Set the logging priority of the <i>udev</i> daemon to <i>LEVEL</i> (e.g., <i>info</i>, <i>debug</i>).<br><br><b><b>--reload-rules</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>control</i> subcommand) Request the <i>udev</i> daemon to reload its rules files from disk.<br><br><b><b>-k</b>, <b>--kernel</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>monitor</i> subcommand) Monitor kernel <i>uevents</i> directly from the kernel.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--udev</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>monitor</i> subcommand) Monitor <i>udev</i> events, which include information processed by <i>udev</i> rules.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--subsystem=<i>SUBSYS</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>monitor</i>/<i>trigger</i> subcommands) Filter events by a specific device <i>SUBSYS</i> (e.g., <i>block</i>, <i>net</i>).<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--tag=<i>TAG</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>monitor</i>/<i>trigger</i> subcommands) Filter events by a <i>udev</i> <i>TAG</i> defined in rules.<br><br><b><b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>trigger</i> subcommand) Do not actually trigger events, just print what would be triggered.<br><br><b><b>--action=<i>ACTION</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>trigger</i>/<i>test</i> subcommands) Specify the <i>ACTION</i> to simulate (e.g., <i>add</i>, <i>change</i>, <i>remove</i>).<br><br><b><b>--timeout=<i>SECONDS</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>settle</i> subcommand) Wait for at most <i>SECONDS</i> for all pending events to finish processing.<br><br><b><b>-E</b>, <b>--exit-if-idle</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<i>settle</i> subcommand) Exit immediately if no events are pending, without waiting for the timeout.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>udevadm</b></i> is a command-line utility used to manage the <i>udev</i> daemon, query the <i>udev</i> database, control <i>udev</i> device events, and debug <i>udev</i> rules. It provides various subcommands to interact with the <i>udev</i> system. For instance, it can monitor kernel events, trigger device events, test <i>udev</i> rules against specific devices, or settle pending <i>udev</i> events.<br><br><i>udev</i> itself is a device manager for the Linux kernel, dynamically creating device nodes (<i>/dev/</i>) and handling device events. <i><b>udevadm</b></i> is an essential tool for system administrators and developers to understand and troubleshoot how the kernel detects and manages hardware devices. It plays a crucial role in ensuring that devices are correctly recognized, configured, and accessible upon connection or boot.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Most operations of <i><b>udevadm</b></i>, particularly those involving modifications like <i>control</i> or <i>trigger</i>, require root privileges.<br>The <i><b>udevadm test</b></i> subcommand is a simulation tool and does not make any actual changes to the system; it's solely for debugging <i>udev</i> rules.<br>Effective use often requires a good understanding of the <i>sysfs</i> filesystem structure and <i>udev</i> rule syntax.


title: UDEV RULES
content:
<i><b>udevadm</b></i> is frequently used in conjunction with <i>udev</i> rules, which are typically found in <i>/etc/udev/rules.d/</i> and <i>/lib/udev/rules.d/</i>. These rules define how <i>udev</i> processes device events, allowing for actions like creating specific symbolic links, setting file permissions, or executing external scripts. The <i><b>udevadm test</b></i> subcommand is an indispensable tool for debugging and validating these rules before deployment.


title: DEVICE ATTRIBUTES IN SYSFS
content:
The <i>sysfs</i> filesystem (mounted at <i>/sys</i>) exports a hierarchical view of the kernel's device model, exposing various device attributes. The <i><b>udevadm info -a</b></i> command is particularly useful as it traverses up the <i>sysfs</i> tree from a specified device, displaying all discoverable attributes. These attributes are fundamental for writing precise and robust <i>udev</i> rules that target specific hardware characteristics.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>udev</i> replaced the older <i>devfs</i> in the Linux kernel 2.6 series, addressing its limitations such as non-persistent device names. <i>udev</i> was designed to provide dynamic and persistent device naming based on unique device attributes like bus paths or serial numbers. <i><b>udevadm</b></i> was developed as the primary user-space utility to interact with this new device management system. Its functionality has evolved alongside <i>udev</i>, which eventually became an integral part of the <i>systemd</i> project, consolidating device management and initialization processes.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>udevmon</I> is a lightweight daemon specifically designed for desktop environments like LXDE. Its primary function is to monitor udev events, which are generated by the Linux kernel when device states change (e.g., a USB drive is plugged in, a monitor is connected or disconnected). Upon detecting relevant events, <I>udevmon</I> can trigger pre-configured actions or scripts, allowing for automatic device configuration and management. For instance, it can automatically invoke tools like <I>lxrandr</I> to adjust display settings when an external monitor is connected, or facilitate the automounting of removable storage devices. It runs silently in the background, ensuring a responsive and dynamic user experience without requiring manual intervention for common hardware changes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command is primarily associated with the LXDE desktop environment and its related components. Its functionality might be integrated differently or superseded by native system-wide udev handling mechanisms (like <I>systemd-udevd</I>) in other desktop environments or non-LXDE systems. Users typically do not interact with <I>udevmon</I> directly after it has been launched by the session manager.


title: PURPOSE IN LXDE
content:
In the LXDE desktop environment, <I>udevmon</I> plays a crucial role in enhancing user convenience by automating responses to hardware changes. It allows components like <I>lxrandr</I> to automatically adjust screen resolutions or configurations when monitors are connected or disconnected, and helps manage removable media without requiring manual mounting. It is typically started automatically as part of the LXDE session startup.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>udevmon</I> was developed as part of the Lightweight X11 Desktop Environment (LXDE) project. It was created to provide dynamic device management capabilities, such as automatic display configuration and removable media handling, specifically tailored for resource-efficient desktop environments where a full-fledged <I>systemd</I> or other complex daemons might be considered too heavy. Its development aligned with LXDE's philosophy of offering a fast and energy-efficient user experience.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help message for <I>udisksctl</I> or a specific command.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show program version information.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show an overview of known block devices and their current status.<br><br><b>info --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show detailed information about a specific block device (e.g., <I>/dev/sda1</I>).<br><br><b>mount --block-device DEVICE [--options OPTIONS]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mount a filesystem located on a specified block device. Various mount options can be passed.<br><br><b>unmount --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Unmount a mounted filesystem from a specified block device.<br><br><b>power-off --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Power off a device, typically used for removable media like USB drives.<br><br><b>eject --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Eject removable media (e.g., CD/DVD) from an optical drive.<br><br><b>loop-setup --file FILE [--options OPTIONS]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set up a loop device from a disk image file, making it accessible as a block device.<br><br><b>loop-delete --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete (disconnect) an existing loop device.<br><br><b>luks-unlock --block-device DEVICE [--key-file FILE]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Unlock a LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) encrypted volume, prompting for a passphrase if no key file is given.<br><br><b>luks-lock --block-device DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lock a LUKS encrypted volume, making it inaccessible until unlocked again.<br><br><b>dump</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump all information about all objects (devices, filesystems, etc.) currently managed by <I>udisks</I>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<br>The <I>udisks</I> command typically refers to <I>udisksctl</I>, a command-line client for the <I>udisksd</I> D-Bus daemon. <I>udisks</I> provides a standardized and extensible way for applications and users to interact with and manage storage devices, including hard drives, solid-state drives, optical media, and removable devices like USB sticks.<br><br>It acts as a central service that exposes device information and capabilities via D-Bus, allowing desktop environments and user applications to perform operations such as mounting and unmounting filesystems, formatting partitions, enabling or disabling device caches, unlocking encrypted volumes (LUKS), and ejecting removable media.<br><br>Prior to <I>udisks</I>, similar functionality was often handled by separate utilities or by the now-deprecated <I>HAL</I> (Hardware Abstraction Layer) and <I>DeviceKit</I>. <I>udisks</I> aims to provide a unified, robust, and secure interface, often integrating with <I>PolicyKit</I> for privilege management and <I>udev</I> for device event handling. Users generally interact with <I>udisks</I> through its client <I>udisksctl</I> or through graphical file managers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<br><I>udisks</I> operations often require administrative privileges or proper <I>PolicyKit</I> authentication rules. Without these, commands like mounting or formatting may fail due to permission errors. Users interacting with desktop environments rarely need to use <I>udisksctl</I> directly, as these environments automate common tasks like mounting USB drives through the <I>udisksd</I> daemon. The term "udisks" can refer to the entire D-Bus service, the <I>udisksd</I> daemon, or the <I>udisksctl</I> client command; this analysis focuses on the user-facing <I>udisksctl</I> client.


title: <I>UDISKSD</I> DAEMON
content:
The core of the <I>udisks</I> system is the <I>udisksd</I> daemon, which runs in the background. It continuously monitors block devices, manages their state, and provides the D-Bus interface that allows other applications and the <I>udisksctl</I> command to interact with storage hardware.


title: POLICYKIT INTEGRATION
content:
<I>udisks</I> leverages <I>PolicyKit</I> (now commonly known as <I>polkit</I>) for fine-grained authorization. This integration enables system administrators to define precise rules on which users or groups are permitted to perform specific <I>udisks</I> operations (e.g., mounting external drives, formatting partitions) without needing direct root privileges for every action, enhancing system security.


title: DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
content:
When using <I>udisksctl</I>, devices are typically identified by their full block device path (e.g., <I>/dev/sda1</I>) or by their <I>udisks</I> object path (e.g., <I>/org/freedesktop/UDisks2/block_devices/sda1</I>). These object paths can be discovered using commands like <I>udisksctl dump</I> or <I>udisksctl info</I>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<br><I>udisks</I> is part of the <I>FreeDesktop.org</I> project and was developed as a modern replacement for older hardware abstraction layers like <I>HAL</I> (Hardware Abstraction Layer) and subsequently <I>DeviceKit</I>.<br><br>The initial <I>udisks</I> (sometimes referred to as <I>udisks1</I>) was succeeded by <I>udisks2</I>, which represents a significant rewrite and improvement. <I>udisks2</I> offers better integration with <I>systemd</I> and <I>PolicyKit</I>, and provides a more robust D-Bus API for desktop environments and applications to manage storage devices. The <I>udisksctl</I> command described here is the standard client for <I>udisks2</I>.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<I>mount(8)</I>, <I>umount(8)</I>, <I>lsblk(8)</I>, <I>blkid(8)</I>, <I>parted(8)</I>, <I>cryptsetup(8)</I>, <I>losetup(8)</I>, <I>systemd-udevd(8)</I>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>udisks-daemon</code><br><br><i>Note: The <b>udisks-daemon</b> is primarily invoked by the system's init system (e.g., systemd) as a background service and generally does not accept direct user-specified command-line options. Its main interaction point is its D-Bus API.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>udisks-daemon</b> is the core D-Bus service of the <i>udisks</i> framework, designed to manage storage devices and their various operations on Linux systems. It acts as an interface for user-space applications and desktop environments to interact with disks, partitions, and removable media without requiring direct root privileges for every action. The daemon handles the detection of new storage devices, mounting and unmounting of filesystems, formatting disks, creating and deleting partitions, and managing cryptographic volumes like LUKS. It integrates with <i>PolicyKit</i> for authorization, ensuring secure and controlled access to sensitive disk operations. Typically, <b>udisks-daemon</b> runs in the background, automatically started by the system's init system (e.g., <i>systemd</i>), and its primary mode of interaction is through its D-Bus API, rather than direct command-line arguments for users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires <i>PolicyKit</i> for authorization; misconfiguration can lead to permission denied errors for disk operations.<br>Primarily designed for D-Bus interaction, not direct command-line use by end-users.<br>Not to be confused with <b>udisksctl</b>, which is the command-line client for interacting with the <b>udisks-daemon</b>.


title: D-BUS INTERFACE
content:
The primary way to interact with <b>udisks-daemon</b> is through its D-Bus interface. This allows graphical file managers, desktop environments (like GNOME, KDE), and other applications to discover, inspect, and manipulate storage devices programmatically. Common D-Bus methods include mounting/unmounting, formatting, and ejecting devices.


title: AUTHORIZATION WITH POLICYKIT
content:
For security, <b>udisks-daemon</b> relies heavily on <i>PolicyKit</i> (also known as <i>polkit</i>) to manage authorization for privileged operations. When an application requests an action that requires elevated permissions (e.g., formatting a drive), <i>PolicyKit</i> policies determine whether the calling user is authorized, often prompting for a password or requiring membership in specific groups.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>udisks</i> project, which includes <b>udisks-daemon</b>, emerged as a replacement for <i>HAL (Hardware Abstraction Layer)</i> and <i>DeviceKit-disks</i>, aiming to provide a more modern and robust D-Bus interface for storage device management.<br>Initially, <i>udisks1</i> was developed, with its daemon often named <b>udisksd</b>. It was later succeeded by <i>udisks2</i>, which introduced significant improvements and is the current standard. <b>udisks-daemon</b> refers specifically to the daemon component of the <i>udisks2</i> framework.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--port</b> <i>&lt;port&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the TCP port number on which the bridge will listen for incoming connections. The default port is commonly 9000.<br><br><b><b>--address</b> <i>&lt;address&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the IP address or hostname to which the bridge will bind. By default, it often binds to <i>127.0.0.1</i> (localhost). Use <i>0.0.0.0</i> to listen on all available network interfaces.<br><br><b><b>--no-fork</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the process from forking into the background, useful for debugging or when running under a process supervisor.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug output, which can be helpful for troubleshooting connection or D-Bus communication issues.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a short help message with available command-line options.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <i>udisks-tcp-bridge</i> utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>udisks-tcp-bridge</i> is a utility that allows the <i>udisksd</i> D-Bus interface to be accessed over a TCP network connection. It acts as a proxy, receiving requests via TCP, translating them into D-Bus calls to the local <i>udisksd</i> daemon, and then sending the responses back over the TCP connection. This can be particularly useful in scenarios where a client application or a remote system needs to interact with <i>udisksd</i> for disk management operations (like mounting, unmounting, formatting, or querying disk information) but does not have direct access to the D-Bus system bus.<br><br>By default, it typically binds to the localhost interface (127.0.0.1) and a specific port (commonly 9000), making it only accessible from the local machine for security reasons. However, it can be configured to bind to all network interfaces (0.0.0.0) to allow remote access. Due to the sensitive nature of disk management operations, exposing this bridge over a network without proper security measures (such as VPN, SSH tunneling, or strong firewall rules) is highly discouraged.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Security Risk:</b> Exposing <i>udisks-tcp-bridge</i> to an untrusted network is a significant security risk. There is typically no built-in authentication or encryption. Anyone who can connect to the specified port could potentially perform disk operations on the system, including mounting/unmounting partitions, creating filesystems, or querying sensitive disk information. It is strongly recommended to restrict access using a firewall, run it only on localhost and use an SSH tunnel, or employ a VPN for remote access.<br><br><b>Firewall Configuration:</b> If you need to access the bridge from a remote host, you must configure your system's firewall (e.g., <i>ufw</i>, <i>firewalld</i>, or <i>iptables</i>) to allow incoming connections on the specified TCP port.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
<ul><li><b>Remote Administration:</b> Managing disks on a headless server or a remote system without a full desktop environment, by connecting to the bridge from a client application.</li><li><b>Containerized Environments:</b> Accessing host disk management from within a container that doesn't have direct D-Bus access.</li><li><b>Specialized Client Applications:</b> Developing custom applications that need to interact with udisks functionality but are implemented in languages or environments that prefer network socket communication over D-Bus API calls.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>udisks-tcp-bridge</i> utility is part of the <i>udisks2</i> project, which is the successor to the original <i>udisks</i> daemon. <i>udisks2</i> was developed to provide a modern, D-Bus-based interface for managing storage devices on Linux systems, integrating with Desktop Environments like GNOME and KDE. The TCP bridge was introduced to address specific use cases where direct D-Bus access is not feasible or desired, allowing for greater flexibility in deployment scenarios, particularly in remote administration or specialized embedded systems where a direct D-Bus connection might be cumbersome to establish.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
udisksctl [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>COMMAND</I> [<I>ARGUMENTS</I>] <br><br> Examples:<br> <B>udisksctl info -b /dev/sda1</B><br> <B>udisksctl mount -b /dev/sdb2</B><br> <B>udisksctl unmount -b /dev/sdb2</B>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of udisksctl.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message for udisksctl or a specific command.<br><br><b>info -b DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about the specified device. <I>DEVICE</I> can be a path like <B>/dev/sda1</B> or a UDisks object path.<br><br><b>mount -b DEVICE [--options OPTIONS]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mounts the file system on the specified device. <I>OPTIONS</I> are comma-separated mount options (e.g., <B>ro</B>, <B>noatime</B>).<br><br><b>unmount -b DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Unmounts the file system from the specified device.<br><br><b>power-off -b DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Powers off the specified disk. This action requires that no partitions on the disk are currently in use.<br><br><b>unlock -b DEVICE [--new-key-fd FD]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Unlocks an encrypted device (e.g., a LUKS volume). <I>FD</I> is an optional file descriptor for reading the passphrase, typically <B>0</B> for stdin.<br><br><b>lock -b DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Locks an encrypted device, making its contents inaccessible until unlocked again.<br><br><b>format -b DEVICE --type TYPE [--id-label LABEL]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Formats the specified device with the given file system <I>TYPE</I> (e.g., <B>ext4</B>, <B>vfat</B>, <B>ntfs</B>). An optional <I>LABEL</I> can be set for the new file system.<br><br><b>loop-setup -f FILE [--read-only]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets up a loop device from a disk image <I>FILE</I>. The optional <B>--read-only</B> flag mounts the loop device as read-only.<br><br><b>loop-delete -b DEVICE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a specified loop device.<br><br><b>monitor</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitors D-Bus signals from the UDisks service, showing real-time events related to device changes (e.g., hot-plugging, mounting).<br><br><b>dump</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps information about all objects (disks, partitions, filesystems) currently managed by UDisks.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the general status of the UDisks service and a summary of connected devices.<br><br><b>log</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves and displays the log messages from the <B>udisksd</B> daemon.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
udisksctl is a command-line tool used to interact with the <I>UDisks</I> D-Bus service, which provides a high-level interface for managing storage devices. It allows users and administrators to perform various operations on disks, partitions, and loop devices without directly manipulating low-level device files. <br><br> Key functionalities include retrieving detailed information about devices, mounting and unmounting file systems, unlocking encrypted volumes (like LUKS), formatting partitions, creating and deleting loop devices from disk images, and powering off physical drives. <br><br> udisksctl acts as a front-end to the udisksd daemon, leveraging D-Bus for inter-process communication and <I>Polkit</I> for privilege management. This design ensures that unprivileged users can perform safe operations (e.g., mounting removable media), while more sensitive actions (e.g., formatting system disks) require elevated permissions. It is commonly used in desktop environments and server systems for automated or manual disk management tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Most operations involving system disks or modifications (e.g., formatting, powering off) require elevated privileges, which are typically managed via <I>Polkit</I> rules. <br><br> <B>udisksctl</B> relies on the <B>udisksd</B> D-Bus service being active; if the service is not running, the command will fail. <br><br> Device paths like <B>/dev/sdXN</B> are ephemeral and can change across reboots or hot-plugging; for persistent identification, it's often more reliable to use UUIDs or PARTUUIDs, which UDisks supports.


title: D-BUS AND POLKIT INTEGRATION
content:
<B>udisksctl</B> communicates with the <B>udisksd</B> daemon via <I>D-Bus</I>, the inter-process communication system. Permissions for operations are enforced by <I>Polkit</I> (PolicyKit), which allows fine-grained control over who can perform specific actions (e.g., mount a USB drive, format a hard disk) without requiring full root privileges for all users. This integration is central to its security model and ease of use in desktop environments.


title: DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
content:
While <B>/dev/sdXN</B> paths are commonly used with <B>udisksctl</B>, it's often more robust to refer to devices using their persistent identifiers. For example, UDisks can identify devices by <B>UUID</B> (Universally Unique Identifier) or <B>PARTUUID</B> (Partition UUID), which remain constant even if the device's <B>/dev</B> path changes. Users can often pass a path like <B>/dev/disk/by-uuid/...</B> or <B>/dev/disk/by-partuuid/...</B> to <B>udisksctl</B> commands for greater reliability.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>UDisks</I> project, and subsequently <B>udisksctl</B>, evolved as a successor to <I>DeviceKit-disks</I>. <br><br> <I>DeviceKit</I> aimed to provide a hardware abstraction layer, but its functionality was later merged into <I>UDisks</I> (for storage devices) and <I>udev</I> (for general device management). <br><br> <B>udisksctl</B> was introduced to provide a more modern and consistent command-line interface for disk management, leveraging the D-Bus system for communication with the <B>udisksd</B> daemon. Its development is closely tied to desktop environments like GNOME and KDE, which utilize UDisks for auto-mounting and device discovery, but it is also a fundamental tool for server administrators.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows version information and exits.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output for debugging purposes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>udisksd</b> is the D-Bus system daemon that provides a high-level interface for managing storage devices on Linux systems. It discovers and monitors block devices, optical drives, and other storage media, offering functionalities such as mounting filesystems, formatting partitions, creating new partitions, and managing cryptographic volumes (e.g., LUKS). It integrates with <i>udev</i> for device discovery and relies on D-Bus for inter-process communication, enabling desktop environments and applications to interact with storage devices without directly requiring root privileges for every operation.<br><br><b>udisksd</b> is a core component for modern Linux desktops, facilitating hot-plugging, auto-mounting, and device enumeration, making storage management seamless for users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>udisksd</b> is a system daemon primarily managed by <i>systemd</i> or similar init systems. Users should generally not run it directly from the command line, as its lifecycle is handled by the system. Interactions with <b>udisksd</b> are typically performed indirectly via the <i>udisksctl</i> command-line tool or through graphical desktop environments that leverage its D-Bus interface. Misconfiguration or tampering with the daemon can lead to system instability, data loss, or security vulnerabilities related to device access.


title: D-BUS INTERFACE
content:
<b>udisksd</b> exposes a comprehensive D-Bus API, allowing applications and desktop components (such as file managers and disk utilities) to enumerate, mount, unmount, format, and manage storage devices without requiring elevated privileges for each operation. This standardized interface simplifies integration and enhances security within the Linux ecosystem.


title: UDEV INTEGRATION
content:
The <b>udisksd</b> daemon heavily relies on <i>udev</i> events for dynamic device discovery and monitoring. When a storage device is plugged in, unplugged, or its state changes, <i>udev</i> notifies <b>udisksd</b>. The daemon then updates its internal state and propagates these changes through its D-Bus interface, ensuring real-time awareness of storage device availability and status.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>udisksd</b> is part of the UDisks project, which was developed to provide a modern, integrated approach to storage device management on Linux. It effectively replaced older, less integrated systems like HAL (Hardware Abstraction Layer) and DeviceKit, offering a more robust and D-Bus-centric solution. Its development has focused on improving hot-plugging, auto-mounting, and abstracting complex storage operations for desktop environments and applications.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ufraw-batch</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i><INPUT_FILE></i> [...<i>INPUT_FILE</i>]<br><b>ufraw-batch</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] --output=<i><DIRECTORY></i> [--create-id=<i><MODE></i>] <i><INPUT_DIRECTORY></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o <i><file></i>, --output=<i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output filename. If an input directory is given, this specifies the output directory.<br><br><b>--conf=<i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load configuration from a <i>.ufraw</i> sidecar file. This file contains all processing settings.<br><br><b>--overwrite</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing output files without prompting.<br><br><b>--silent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all non-error output during processing.<br><br><b>--create-id=<i><mode></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls the creation of <i>.ufraw</i> sidecar files. Modes: <i>no</i> (default), <i>hard</i> (always create), <i>soft</i> (create only if changes made).<br><br><b>--format=<i><format></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the output image format. Supported: <i>jpeg</i>, <i>tiff</i>, <i>png</i>.<br><br><b>--jpeg-quality=<i><num></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the JPEG compression quality (0-100). Default is 90.<br><br><b>--tiff-bitdepth=<i><num></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the TIFF output bit depth (8 or 16). Default is 16.<br><br><b>--wb=<i><preset></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set white balance preset. Examples: <i>camera</i>, <i>auto</i>, <i>daylight</i>, <i>cloudy</i>, <i>tungsten</i>, <i>fluorescent</i>, <i>flash</i>, <i>custom</i>.<br><br><b>--exposure=<i><float></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjust exposure compensation (e.g., 0.5, -1.0).<br><br><b>--gamma=<i><float></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set gamma correction value. Default is 0.45.<br><br><b>--linear</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a linear tone curve instead of the default sRGB curve.<br><br><b>--saturation=<i><float></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjust color saturation. Default is 1.0.<br><br><b>--clip=<i><mode></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set clipping mode. Examples: <i>camera</i> (default), <i>no</i> (no clipping).<br><br><b>--rotate=<i><angle></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rotate the output image by 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees clockwise.<br><br><b>--resize=<i><WxH></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resize the output image to the specified width and height (e.g., 800x600).<br><br><b>--crop-enabled</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable cropping. Crop area must be defined by <i>--crop-left</i>, etc.<br><br><b>--crop-left=<i><num></i>, --crop-top=<i><num></i>, --crop-right=<i><num></i>, --crop-bottom=<i><num></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Define the cropping area in pixels from the respective edge.<br><br><b>--lens-correction</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply lens distortion correction based on embedded or external profiles.<br><br><b>--darkframe=<i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply dark frame subtraction using the specified dark frame image.<br><br><b>--hotpixel=<i><value></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the hot pixel correction threshold (0-100). Higher values correct more pixels.<br><br><b>--exif</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copy EXIF data from the raw input file to the output image (if supported by format).<br><br><b>--identify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print information about the raw image (e.g., camera model, ISO) to standard output and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <i>ufraw-batch</i> version information.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a detailed help message with all available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ufraw-batch</i> is the command-line interface for <B>UFRaw</B> (Unidentified Flying Raw), a utility for reading and manipulating raw images from digital cameras. It allows users to process raw files without a graphical interface, making it ideal for automated workflows, scripting, and batch conversions. It can apply various image adjustments such as white balance, exposure compensation, color management, and noise reduction, using either parameters specified on the command line or settings stored in UFRaw's sidecar <i>.ufraw</i> files. The processed images can be saved in standard formats like JPEG, TIFF, and PNG, with options for quality, bit depth, and resizing. It's particularly useful for photographers who need to convert large sets of raw files efficiently, or for systems that require automated image preparation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
UFRaw, including <i>ufraw-batch</i>, has not been actively developed since around 2016. While it remains functional for many older raw formats, support for newer camera models and their proprietary raw formats may be limited or absent. It relies on internal raw decoding routines (or an embedded <i>libraw</i> fork) which might not be as up-to-date as dedicated, currently maintained raw converters. Performance can vary depending on the number and size of files, and the complexity of processing options.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES (.UFRAW)
content:
When processing raw files, <i>ufraw-batch</i> (and UFRaw GUI) can read and write <i>.ufraw</i> sidecar files. These XML-based files store all the processing parameters (white balance, exposure, curves, etc.) for a specific raw image. This allows for non-destructive editing and the application of consistent settings across batches without needing to specify every parameter on the command line for each run.


title: HISTORY
content:
UFRaw originated as a GIMP plugin, providing raw image decoding and processing capabilities to the popular image editor. The <i>ufraw-batch</i> command was developed to extend this functionality to the command line, enabling users to leverage UFRaw's powerful processing engine for automated tasks and scripting without needing the GIMP GUI. Its development was closely tied to the evolution of raw camera formats and the underlying <i>dcraw</i> utility (which UFRaw initially used extensively, later embedding its own raw decoding components derived from <i>libraw</i>). While development has largely ceased, it was a significant tool in the open-source photography workflow for many years.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ufw</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>command</i><br><b>ufw</b> [<i>rule-spec</i>]<br><br>Common commands include:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw enable</b> | <b>disable</b> | <b>status</b> [<i>verbose</i> | <i>numbered</i>] | <b>reset</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw default</b> [<i>policy</i>] [<i>incoming</i> | <i>outgoing</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw</b> [<b>allow</b> | <b>deny</b> | <b>reject</b> | <b>limit</b>] [<i>in</i> | <i>out</i> | <i>to</i> | <i>from</i>] [<i>rule</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw delete</b> [<i>rule</i> | <i>rule-number</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw insert</b> <i>num</i> [<i>rule</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw logging</b> [<i>on</i> | <i>off</i> | <i>high</i> | <i>medium</i> | <i>low</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw app</b> [<i>list</i> | <i>info</i> | <i>update</i>] [<i>profile</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw show</b> [<i>added</i> | <i>raw</i> | <i>user</i> | <i>built-in</i> | <i>log</i> | <i>running</i> | <i>listening</i> | <i>route</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>ufw version</b> | <b>ufw --help</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>enable</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates the firewall and configures it to start automatically at boot.<br><br><b>disable</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deactivates the firewall and prevents it from starting on boot.<br><br><b>status [verbose|numbered]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current firewall status and active rules. <i>verbose</i> shows more details; <i>numbered</i> lists rules with numbers for easy deletion.<br><br><b>reset</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resets the firewall to its default state, deleting all custom rules and setting policies to deny incoming and allow outgoing.<br><br><b>default <policy> [incoming|outgoing]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default policy (e.g., <i>allow</i>, <i>deny</i>, <i>reject</i>) for incoming or outgoing connections.<br><br><b>allow <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a rule to explicitly allow specified incoming or outgoing connections based on port, protocol, or IP address.<br><br><b>deny <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a rule to explicitly deny specified incoming or outgoing connections.<br><br><b>reject <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a rule to deny specified connections and send a rejection packet back to the source.<br><br><b>limit <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a rule to limit new connections to a service, commonly used to protect against brute-force attacks on SSH.<br><br><b>delete <rule|rule-number></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes an existing rule, either by specifying the rule itself or its corresponding number from `ufw status numbered`.<br><br><b>insert <num> <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Inserts a rule at a specific numeric position in the rule list, affecting its precedence.<br><br><b>logging [on|off|high|medium|low]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures the level of firewall logging to syslog, ranging from minimal ('low') to extensive ('high').<br><br><b>app <command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages application-specific profiles defined in `/etc/ufw/applications.d`. Commands include <i>list</i>, <i>info</i>, and <i>update</i>.<br><br><b>show <component></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays various internal UFW components and configurations, such as `show added` for user-defined rules or `show raw` for underlying iptables rules.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>Uncomplicated Firewall</b> (ufw) is a command-line interface for managing <i>Netfilter</i>, the Linux kernel's packet filtering framework. It was designed to simplify firewall configuration, making it accessible to users who find the complexity of raw <i>iptables</i> commands daunting.<br><br>UFW abstracts the intricacies of Netfilter rules, allowing users to easily define policies for incoming and outgoing network traffic. It supports common operations such as allowing or denying connections based on ports, protocols, and IP addresses, as well as managing application-specific rules.<br><br>By default, UFW typically denies all incoming connections and allows all outgoing connections, providing a secure baseline. It integrates well with system services and can be configured to start automatically at boot, ensuring continuous protection. While UFW simplifies common tasks, it still leverages the full power of <i>iptables</i> underneath, making it a robust solution for most desktop and server firewall needs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>ufw</b> simplifies firewall management, it's essential to remember that it's a frontend for <i>iptables</i>. Direct manipulation of <i>iptables</i> rules can bypass or conflict with <b>ufw</b>'s configuration. <br><br>Complex networking scenarios, such as advanced routing or multi-homed servers, might still require direct <i>iptables</i> configuration or a more powerful firewall solution. <br><br>Also, rules are processed in order; a broadly permissive rule placed before a specific restrictive rule can undermine security. Always verify the firewall status after making changes, especially after a `ufw reset`.


title: APPLICATION PROFILES
content:
<b>UFW</b> supports <i>application profiles</i>, which are predefined sets of rules for common services (e.g., Apache, SSH). These profiles are typically found in `/etc/ufw/applications.d/` and allow for easy enabling or disabling of service-specific ports, like `ufw allow ssh` or `ufw allow 'Apache Full'`.


title: RULE PRECEDENCE
content:
Rules are processed in a specific order: first, denied rules, then allowed rules. Within these categories, rules are processed from specific to more general. Explicit rules defined by the user always take precedence over default policies, making the order of rule creation important for desired firewall behavior.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>UFW</b> was developed by <i>Canonical Ltd.</i>, the creators of Ubuntu, with the primary goal of simplifying firewall configuration on Linux systems. It first debuted in <i>Ubuntu 8.04 LTS (Hardy Heron)</i> in 2008.<br><br>Prior to UFW, managing firewall rules directly with <i>iptables</i> was often considered complex and error-prone for many users. UFW aimed to provide a more intuitive and user-friendly interface, making basic firewall setup accessible to a wider audience. It has since become a standard component in Ubuntu and is widely available on other Debian-based distributions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>ufw</i> [<i>options</i>] <i>command</i> [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Common commands:<br><i>ufw</i> enable<br><i>ufw</i> disable<br><i>ufw</i> status [<i>verbose</i>|<i>numbered</i>]<br><i>ufw</i> default [<i>allow</i>|<i>deny</i>|<i>reject</i>] [<i>incoming</i>|<i>outgoing</i>]<br><i>ufw</i> [<i>allow</i>|<i>deny</i>|<i>reject</i>|<i>limit</i>] [<i>in</i>|<i>out</i>] [<i>on interface</i>] [<i>to destination</i>] [<i>from source</i>] [<i>port port/protocol</i>] [<i>comment 'rule comment'</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>enable</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates and starts the firewall, setting it to run on boot.<br><br><b>disable</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deactivates and stops the firewall, removing it from starting on boot.<br><br><b>status [verbose|numbered]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current firewall status and the list of active rules. Use 'verbose' for more details or 'numbered' to show rule numbers for deletion.<br><br><b>default <policy> [direction]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default policy for incoming or outgoing connections. Policies can be 'allow', 'deny', or 'reject'. Default direction is 'incoming'.<br><br><b>[allow|deny|reject|limit] <rule></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new firewall rule. Specifies whether to 'allow', 'deny', 'reject' (deny with ICMP message), or 'limit' (rate-limit) connections. Rules can specify ports, protocols, IP addresses, and interfaces.<br><br><b>delete <rule|number></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes an existing rule. Can be done by specifying the full rule or by its number (obtained via '<i>ufw status numbered</i>').<br><br><b>reset</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resets the firewall to its default, disabled state, removing all custom rules.<br><br><b>logging [on|off|level]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables, disables, or sets the logging level for firewall events (e.g., 'low', 'medium', 'high', 'full').<br><br><b>version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current version of the <b>ufw</b> utility.<br><br><b>--dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Simulates a command execution without making actual changes to the firewall rules. Useful for testing.<br><br><b>--force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces an action that would normally require user confirmation, such as '<i>ufw reset</i>'.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ufw</b> (Uncomplicated Firewall) command is a user-friendly front-end for the Linux kernel's <i>netfilter</i> firewall. It serves as a high-level framework that significantly simplifies the process of configuring and managing firewall rules, abstracting away the complexities of direct <i>iptables</i> commands. Developed by Canonical for Ubuntu, <b>ufw</b> aims to make firewall administration accessible to both beginners and experienced users.<br><br>Instead of manually constructing intricate <i>iptables</i> rules, users can use <b>ufw</b> to define firewall policies with simple, intuitive commands. It supports common operations such as enabling or disabling the firewall, setting default policies (e.g., deny incoming, allow outgoing), and adding rules to allow or deny traffic based on ports, protocols, IP addresses, or even application profiles. <b>ufw</b> also provides status checks and logging capabilities.<br><br>While <b>ufw</b> provides a robust and easy-to-use interface, it ultimately translates its commands into <i>iptables</i> rules. This makes it a powerful tool for securing a Linux system without needing deep knowledge of <i>netfilter</i> internals, making it the de-facto standard firewall management tool on Ubuntu and many Debian-based distributions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>ufw</b> greatly simplifies firewall management, it's essential to understand its limitations. Since it acts as a front-end to <i>iptables</i>, direct <i>iptables</i> commands can bypass or conflict with <b>ufw</b>'s rules. Mixing <b>ufw</b> with manual <i>iptables</i> configurations can lead to unexpected behavior. For highly complex or very specific firewall requirements, direct <i>iptables</i> or <i>netfilter</i> configuration might still be necessary. Always ensure your default policies are secure, typically denying incoming connections by default.


title: APPLICATION PROFILES
content:
<b>ufw</b> supports application integration by allowing profiles to be defined for common services (e.g., Apache, OpenSSH). These profiles define the necessary port/protocol rules for an application, simplifying rule creation. You can list available profiles using '<i>ufw app list</i>' and enable them with '<i>ufw allow <profile_name></i>'.


title: RULE PRECEDENCE
content:
The order of rules in <b>ufw</b> matters. Rules are processed from top to bottom, with the first matching rule taking precedence. More specific rules should generally be placed before more general rules. <b>ufw</b> attempts to manage this order automatically, but understanding rule precedence is crucial for effective firewall configuration.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>ufw</b> was developed by Canonical, the company behind Ubuntu, with the primary goal of making firewall configuration more straightforward for Ubuntu users. It first appeared in <i>Ubuntu 8.04 LTS (Hardy Heron)</i> in 2008 and has since become the default firewall management utility on Ubuntu and many other Debian-derived distributions. Its development focused on providing a simplified, high-level interface to the complex <i>netfilter</i> framework, addressing the need for an easy-to-use firewall solution for desktop and server environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>PATTERN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The regular expression or fixed string to search for.<br><br><b><i>FILE...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more files to search. If no files are specified, <i>ugrep</i> reads from standard input.<br><br><b>-i, --ignore-case</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores case distinctions when matching the <i>PATTERN</i>.<br><br><b>-v, --invert-match</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects lines that do not match the <i>PATTERN</i>.<br><br><b>-r, --recursive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively searches through directories and their subdirectories.<br><br><b>-l, --files-with-matches</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints only the names of files containing matches, one per line.<br><br><b>-n, --line-number</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prefixes each match with the 1-based line number within its input file.<br><br><b>-E, --extended-regexp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interprets <i>PATTERN</i> as an extended regular expression (ERE).<br><br><b>-F, --fixed-strings</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interprets <i>PATTERN</i> as a list of fixed strings, separated by newlines, instead of regular expressions.<br><br><b>-P, --perl-regexp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interprets <i>PATTERN</i> as a Perl Compatible Regular Expression (PCRE).<br><br><b>--encoding=<i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input character encoding (e.g., UTF-8, UTF-16, ISO-8859-1). <i>ugrep</i> attempts to auto-detect if not specified.<br><br><b>--best-match</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables fuzzy matching, showing the match that is closest to the <i>PATTERN</i>, even if it's not an exact match.<br><br><b>--approximate=<i>NUM</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs approximate (fuzzy) matching, allowing up to <i>NUM</i> errors (insertions, deletions, substitutions).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ugrep</i> is a powerful and versatile command-line utility designed for searching plain-text data for lines that match a regular expression. Unlike traditional <i>grep</i>, <i>ugrep</i> offers robust support for various Unicode encodings, including UTF-8, UTF-16, and others, automatically detecting the encoding of input files. This makes it an invaluable tool for working with internationalized text and multi-byte character sets, where standard <i>grep</i> might produce incorrect results or fail to find matches due to character encoding issues.<br><br>It combines the familiar functionality and speed of <i>grep</i> with advanced Unicode capabilities, ensuring accurate pattern matching across diverse linguistic content. <i>ugrep</i> is also optimized for performance, often leveraging efficient algorithms and multi-threading to quickly process large files and directories, making it suitable for both casual use and complex data analysis tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>ugrep</i> excels in Unicode handling and performance, it might not be pre-installed on all Linux distributions, requiring manual installation. Its advanced features like fuzzy matching are specific to certain implementations (e.g., Radu Gruian's <i>ugrep</i>) and may not be present in all <i>ugrep</i> variants.


title: ENCODING AUTO-DETECTION
content:
<i>ugrep</i> attempts to automatically detect the character encoding of input files. This feature significantly simplifies working with diverse text files without requiring manual specification of encoding for each file.


title: PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATIONS
content:
Beyond Unicode handling, <i>ugrep</i> is often optimized for speed, employing techniques like memory mapping (<i>mmap</i>) and multi-threading to enhance search performance on large datasets. This makes it one of the faster tools for text searching.


title: APPROXIMATE/FUZZY MATCHING
content:
A standout feature of some <i>ugrep</i> implementations is its ability to perform approximate or fuzzy matching. This allows users to find patterns that are 'close enough' to the specified <i>PATTERN</i>, tolerating a certain number of errors (insertions, deletions, substitutions), which is highly useful for searching noisy data or when the exact spelling is uncertain.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ugrep</i> emerged as a solution to the limitations of traditional <i>grep</i> when dealing with the increasing prevalence of multi-byte character encodings, particularly UTF-8. As globalized content became standard, the need for a search tool that could correctly interpret and match patterns across various Unicode scripts became critical. The most widely recognized implementation, developed by Radu Gruian, significantly expanded on <i>grep</i>'s capabilities by integrating robust Unicode support, advanced regular expression engines, and performance optimizations. It addresses the challenge of accurately searching internationalized text files, which often proved problematic for older tools not designed with comprehensive Unicode awareness.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>UIM</i> (Universal Input Method) is an input method framework designed for <br> Unix-like operating systems. It provides a flexible and extensible way for <br> users to input various languages, especially those with complex character sets <br> like <b>Japanese</b>, <b>Chinese</b>, and <b>Korean</b>. It abstracts the input <br> process, allowing different input engines (e.g., Kana-kanji conversion, <br> Pinyin) to be used consistently across applications. <br><br> <i>UIM</i> integrates with various toolkits and desktop environments, including <br> <b>GTK+</b>, <b>Qt</b>, and <b>XIM</b> (X Input Method). It aims to be highly <br> customizable, supporting user-defined keybindings, dictionaries, and <br> conversion rules. The <b>uim</b> command itself is typically a minimal utility <br> or a component of the broader framework, often used to launch or manage <br> other <i>UIM</i>-related tools like <b>uim-fep</b> (front-end processor), <br> <b>uim-xim</b> (XIM server), or <b>uim-pref</b> (preferences).


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>uim</b> command itself is often a wrapper or a minimal utility. Most <br> user interaction and configuration of the <i>UIM</i> framework occur <br> through related commands like <b>uim-fep</b>, <b>uim-pref</b>, or by <br> setting appropriate environment variables such as <b>GTK_IM_MODULE</b>, <br> <b>QT_IM_MODULE</b>, and <b>XMODIFIERS</b>. Incorrect setup of these <br> variables or conflicts with other installed input methods can lead to <br> unexpected behavior or non-functional input.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>UIM</i>'s behavior is extensively controlled by configuration files, <br> typically located in a user's home directory under <b>~/.uim</b> or <br> system-wide in <b>/etc/uim</b>. The graphical utility <b>uim-pref</b> is <br> the recommended tool for managing these settings, including input method <br> engines, keybindings, and dictionaries.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
For <i>UIM</i> to function correctly and integrate with applications, <br> crucial environment variables must be set. These include <b>GTK_IM_MODULE</b>, <br> <b>QT_IM_MODULE</b>, and <b>XMODIFIERS</b>. Users often set these in their <br> shell's profile (e.g., <b>~/.bashrc</b>, <b>~/.xinitrc</b>) or rely on their <br> desktop environment to manage them.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>UIM</i> project was initiated around <b>2003</b> by <i>Daiki Ueno</i>, <br> with the goal of creating a universal and extensible input method <br> framework to overcome limitations found in existing systems like <i>SCIM</i>. <br> It quickly gained traction, particularly within the <b>Japanese</b> Linux <br> community, as a robust and highly customizable alternative. While still <br> actively maintained, <i>UIM</i> faces strong competition from newer input <br> methods such as <i>IBus</i> and <i>Fcitx</i>, which have become default <br> choices in many modern Linux distributions.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>ibus</b>(1), <b>fcitx</b>(1), <b>xim</b>(7), <b>uim-fep</b>(1), <b>uim-pref</b>(1), <b>locale</b>(1)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-i</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Do not use the terminal's native underline capability. Instead, force the use of the overstrike method (e.g., outputting <code>_</code> then <code>\b</code> then the character) even if the terminal supports direct underlining via control sequences.</i><br><br><b><i>-t type</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Override the terminal type specified by the <code>TERM</code> environment variable. This is useful for testing how output would appear on a different type of terminal.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ul</b> command processes text input, typically from files or standard input, and converts specific escape sequences or character combinations into visual underlining. Historically, many terminals lacked direct hardware support for underlining characters. Instead, applications like text formatters (e.g., <i>nroff</i>, <i>troff</i>) would produce output where an underscore character (<i>_</i>) was overstruck with a backspace (<i>\b</i>) followed by the character to be underlined, or vice-versa. <b>ul</b> intercepts these patterns and translates them into appropriate control sequences that a terminal <i>can</i> interpret for underlining (e.g., using special character modes, or by repeating the overstrike method if the terminal truly has no native underline support).<br><br>While highly relevant in the era of early character-based terminals, <b>ul</b>'s utility has significantly diminished with modern terminal emulators, which typically support ANSI escape codes (SGR 4) for direct underlining. Consequently, <b>ul</b> is often not installed by default or is considered an obsolete utility.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>ul</b> command is largely obsolete for modern computing environments. Most contemporary terminal emulators (like GNOME Terminal, Konsole, xterm, iTerm2, etc.) fully support standard ANSI escape codes for underlining (SGR 4), making <b>ul</b>'s translation services unnecessary. Its primary use case was with older, less capable hardware terminals. As such, <b>ul</b> may not be installed by default on many Linux distributions, or its behavior might not be immediately apparent when piping output from modern tools that directly produce SGR codes. Using <b>ul</b> with output that already uses SGR codes might lead to unexpected or no visible changes.


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
<b>ul</b> is typically used in a pipeline with text formatting commands that generate overstrike sequences for underlining, such as <i>nroff</i> or <i>troff</i>. For example: <code><br><i>nroff -ms document.ms | ul</i></code><br>This command would format 'document.ms' using the <i>nroff</i> formatter and then pipe its output through <b>ul</b> to correctly display any intended underlining on older terminals.


title: MODERN RELEVANCE
content:
In modern Linux environments, applications and shell utilities typically output ANSI escape codes (SGR parameters) directly for text attributes like bold, underline, and color. These codes are natively understood by contemporary terminal emulators. Therefore, <b>ul</b> is rarely needed today and might even conflict or produce no effect if the input already contains modern escape sequences.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>ul</b> command has its roots in early Unix systems, specifically originating from BSD (Berkeley Software Distribution) Unix. It was developed to address the display limitations of text-only terminals of the time. These terminals often lacked dedicated hardware features for graphical attributes like underlining, bolding, or inverse video. Text formatting systems like <i>nroff</i> and <i>troff</i> would generate "overstrike" sequences (e.g., a character followed by a backspace and an underscore) to achieve the effect of underlining. <b>ul</b> served as a filter to interpret these sequences and render them visually, either by utilizing rudimentary terminal capabilities or by converting them into alternative emphasis methods. Its importance waned as more sophisticated terminal hardware and later, software emulators, became standard, incorporating direct support for advanced text attributes via escape sequences.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-H</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets or displays the <b>hard</b> limit. Hard limits can only be increased by the root user.<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets or displays the <b>soft</b> limit (default). Soft limits can be increased up to the hard limit by non-root users.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays all current soft resource limits.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Core file size (in 512-byte blocks).<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Data segment size (in kilobytes).<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;File size (in 512-byte blocks) for files created by the shell and its children.<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of pending signals.<br><br><b>-k</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of Kbytes that may be locked into memory (obsolete, use <i>-l</i>).<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum size (in kilobytes) that may be locked into memory.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum resident set size (in kilobytes).<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of open file descriptors.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The pipe size (in 512-byte blocks).<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of bytes in POSIX message queues.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum real-time priority.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum stack size (in kilobytes).<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum amount of CPU time (in seconds) used by each process.<br><br><b>-u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of processes available to a single user.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum amount of virtual memory (in kilobytes) available to the shell and its children.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The maximum number of file locks.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ulimit</i> (user limit) is a built-in shell command in Unix-like operating systems that allows you to view or set resource limits for the current user's processes. These limits dictate the maximum amount of system resources that a process or group of processes can consume. Resources include CPU time, file size, data segment size, stack size, core file size, the number of open files, and the number of processes.<br><br>The command operates on two types of limits: <i>soft limits</i> and <i>hard limits</i>. Soft limits are the current, effective limits that can be increased by a user up to the corresponding hard limit. Hard limits represent the maximum value a soft limit can take and can only be increased by the root user.<br><br>Setting appropriate <i>ulimit</i> values is crucial for system stability and security. It prevents single processes or users from consuming excessive resources, which could degrade system performance or lead to denial-of-service. Common uses include preventing runaway processes from filling up disk space with large files or consuming all available memory. Limits set with <i>ulimit</i> apply to the current shell and any processes started from it. For persistent system-wide limits, configuration files like <i>/etc/security/limits.conf</i> are typically used.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Limits set by <i>ulimit</i> are inherited by child processes but are not persistent across reboots or new login sessions unless explicitly configured. Non-root users can only decrease hard limits or increase soft limits up to the current hard limit; only the root user can increase hard limits. Some resource limits might be system-wide and not configurable via <i>ulimit</i> directly, or might be constrained by kernel parameters.


title: UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
content:
The unit for the <i>limit</i> value varies depending on the resource being controlled:<br><i>-f</i> (file size) and <i>-c</i> (core file size) are in 512-byte blocks.<br><i>-d</i> (data segment), <i>-s</i> (stack), <i>-l</i> (locked memory), <i>-m</i> (resident set), and <i>-v</i> (virtual memory) are in kilobytes.<br><i>-t</i> (CPU time) is in seconds.<br>Other options like <i>-n</i> (open files), <i>-u</i> (processes), <i>-i</i> (signals), and <i>-x</i> (file locks) are raw counts. The keyword '<i>unlimited</i>' can be used to remove a limit.


